WO2022002080A1 - 一种通信路径切换方法、装置及系统 - Google Patents

一种通信路径切换方法、装置及系统 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022002080A1
WO2022002080A1 PCT/CN2021/103293 CN2021103293W WO2022002080A1 WO 2022002080 A1 WO2022002080 A1 WO 2022002080A1 CN 2021103293 W CN2021103293 W CN 2021103293W WO 2022002080 A1 WO2022002080 A1 WO 2022002080A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
terminal
identifier
network device
message
rrc connection
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2021/103293
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
王南鑫
彭文杰
王君
徐海博
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority to EP21832781.5A priority Critical patent/EP4171121A4/en
Publication of WO2022002080A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022002080A1/zh
Priority to US18/146,552 priority patent/US20230156564A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/03—Reselecting a link using a direct mode connection
    • H04W36/033—Reselecting a link using a direct mode connection in pre-organised networks
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0011—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off for data sessions of end-to-end connection
    • H04W36/0033—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off for data sessions of end-to-end connection with transfer of context information
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W40/00—Communication routing or communication path finding
    • H04W40/34—Modification of an existing route
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0055—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/24—Reselection being triggered by specific parameters
    • H04W36/30—Reselection being triggered by specific parameters by measured or perceived connection quality data
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W40/00—Communication routing or communication path finding
    • H04W40/02—Communication route or path selection, e.g. power-based or shortest path routing
    • H04W40/22—Communication route or path selection, e.g. power-based or shortest path routing using selective relaying for reaching a BTS [Base Transceiver Station] or an access point
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W40/00—Communication routing or communication path finding
    • H04W40/34—Modification of an existing route
    • H04W40/36—Modification of an existing route due to handover
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/20—Manipulation of established connections
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W88/00—Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
    • H04W88/02—Terminal devices
    • H04W88/04—Terminal devices adapted for relaying to or from another terminal or user
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/24—Reselection being triggered by specific parameters
    • H04W36/30—Reselection being triggered by specific parameters by measured or perceived connection quality data
    • H04W36/302—Reselection being triggered by specific parameters by measured or perceived connection quality data due to low signal strength
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W92/00—Interfaces specially adapted for wireless communication networks
    • H04W92/16—Interfaces between hierarchically similar devices
    • H04W92/20—Interfaces between hierarchically similar devices between access points

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a communication path switching method, device, and system.
  • the terminal switches the communication path according to different communication requirements.
  • the accuracy of the communication path switching and the low delay of the communication are important. put forward higher requirements. How to ensure the accuracy of communication path switching and low communication delay is a problem that needs to be solved at present.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a communication path switching method, device, and system, so as to ensure the accuracy of terminal communication path switching and low communication delay.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method may be executed by a second terminal, and may also be executed by a component of the second terminal (for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.).
  • a component of the second terminal for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.
  • this The embodiment of the application is described by taking the implementation of the method for the second terminal as an example, including: the second terminal receives a first message sent by the first terminal, where the first message includes a first identifier, and the first identifier is used to identify the first terminal ; the second terminal device determines a third identification according to the first identification, the third identification is used to identify the first terminal in the relay communication link based on the second terminal, and the second terminal is the communication of the first terminal The target terminal for path switching; the second terminal forwards the first radio resource control RRC connection reconfiguration complete message sent by the first terminal to the second network device according to the third identifier, where the first RRC connection reconfiguration
  • the second terminal forwards the first radio resource control RRC connection reconfiguration complete message sent by the first terminal to the second network device according to the third identifier. It can be understood that the second terminal forwards the first terminal to the second network device.
  • the second radio resource control RRC connection reconfiguration complete message sent by the second network device carries the third identifier.
  • the second terminal when receiving the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message, the second terminal adds a packet header, the packet header carries the third identifier, and forwards the packet header and the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message as a whole to the second network device .
  • the second terminal can be made to identify the first terminal according to the first identifier reported by the first terminal, determine which RRC connection reconfiguration completion message corresponding to the first terminal is forwarded, and ensure that the second network device correctly completes the new RRC connection reconfiguration message.
  • the second terminal receives a first message sent by the first terminal, where the first message includes a third identifier, that is, the first identifier is directly the third identifier.
  • the second terminal allocates a third identifier according to the first identifier in the first message, and the second terminal sends second indication information to the second network device, where the second indication information includes the first identifier and the The association relationship of the third identifier.
  • the second terminal can allocate or generate the third identifier for the first terminal according to the first identifier, and notify the second network device of the first identifier and the third identifier.
  • the association relationship of the third identifier is convenient for the second terminal and the second network device to maintain the third identifier.
  • the second terminal can allocate the first terminal according to the layer 2 identifier (layer 2 identifier, L2 ID) of the first terminal.
  • the specific implementation process is: the second terminal sends second indication information to the second network device, where the second indication information includes the association relationship between the L2 ID and the third identification.
  • the second terminal can allocate or generate a third identifier for the first terminal according to the L2 ID, and notify the second network device of the association between the L2 ID and the third identifier, and the second terminal will connect to the first RRC
  • the first identifier and the third identifier are sent to the second network device together, so that the second terminal and the second network device can maintain the third identifier.
  • the second terminal sends the first identification to the second network device; the second terminal receives third indication information sent by the second network device, where the third indication information includes the first identification and the third identification association relationship.
  • the third identifier can be allocated by the second network device. Specifically, the first identifier is reported to the second network device through the second terminal, and the second network device allocates a third identifier according to the first identifier, and sends the third identifier, together with the first identifier and the third identifier to the second terminal.
  • the association relationship of the identifier is convenient for the second terminal and the second network device to maintain the third identifier.
  • the second terminal may allocate a third identifier according to the L2 ID of the first terminal.
  • the specific implementation process is: the second terminal sends the second indication information to the second network device.
  • the second indication information includes the association relationship between the L2 ID and the third identifier.
  • the second terminal can allocate or generate a third identifier for the first terminal according to the L2 ID, and notify the second network device of the association between the L2 ID and the third identifier, and the second terminal will connect to the first RRC
  • the first identifier and the third identifier are sent to the second network device together, so that the second terminal and the second network device can maintain the third identifier.
  • the second terminal before the second terminal receives the first message sent by the first terminal, receives a second message from the second network device, where the second message includes configuration information of the first bearer, and the second message includes the configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the two terminals establish a first bearer according to the second message.
  • the first bearer includes: a radio bearer between the second terminal and the first terminal for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal, and a communication between the second terminal and the second network device.
  • the radio bearer that transmits the signaling and data of the first terminal between them.
  • the first bearer can be established in advance, so that after receiving the first message sent by the first terminal, the second terminal can directly send the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the second network device through the first bearer, thereby reducing the risk of The second terminal bears the large communication delay or even the communication interruption introduced by the establishment to ensure low communication delay.
  • the second message further includes the first identifier.
  • carrying the first identifier in the second message helps the second terminal to know the identifier of the first terminal in advance.
  • the second terminal establishes a unicast connection with the first terminal and receives the first message sent by the first terminal After that, it can be determined that the accessed first terminal is the terminal that the second network device instructed to switch and reserved the context before, so as to ensure that the second network device correctly completes the relationship between the newly accessed first terminal and the context of the first terminal reserved in advance. pairing between.
  • the second message further includes fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the second terminal is the target terminal of the communication path switching of the first terminal; the second terminal according to the fourth indication information A third identifier is allocated, the second terminal device sends the third identifier to the second network device, and the first identifier in the first message is the third identifier.
  • the second terminal when the second terminal establishes a unicast connection with the first terminal and receives the first terminal After the first message is sent, it can be determined through the third identifier that the first terminal accessing this access is the terminal that the second network device instructed to switch and that has retained the context, ensuring that the second network device correctly completes the newly accessed first terminal and the terminal.
  • a pairing between the contexts of the first terminal reserved in advance.
  • the second message only includes fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the second terminal is the target terminal of the communication path switching of the first terminal.
  • the second terminal allocates the third identifier according to the fourth indication information, and the second terminal device sends the third identifier to the second network device, and the first identifier in the first message is the third identifier.
  • the second terminal can assign the third identifier corresponding to the first terminal according to the fourth indication information, so that the second terminal and the second network device can acquire and maintain the third identifier.
  • the second terminal After establishing a unicast connection with the first terminal and receiving the first message sent by the first terminal, it can be determined through the third identifier that the first terminal accessing this access is the terminal that the second network device instructed to switch and retain the context, ensuring that The second network device correctly completes the pairing between the newly accessed first terminal and the context of the first terminal reserved in advance.
  • the second terminal carries the third identifier when forwarding the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message through the first bearer.
  • the second terminal forwards the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message according to the first bearer established previously according to the second message, thereby reducing the large communication delay or even communication interruption caused by the establishment of the second terminal bearer, ensuring that Low latency for communication.
  • the second terminal carries the third identifier when forwarding the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message, which is helpful for the second network device to identify the first terminal corresponding to the RRC connection reconfiguration complete message, and has the same identifier as the first terminal reserved in advance. The context is paired correctly.
  • the second terminal forwards the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message through a preconfigured second bearer, and carries the third identifier when forwarding the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message.
  • the second terminal can forward the message through the preconfigured second bearer, which can reduce the number of Due to the large communication delay or even the communication interruption introduced by the bearer establishment of the second terminal, the low delay of the communication is ensured.
  • the second terminal sends a third bearer establishment request message to the second network device, where the third bearer establishment request message includes a third identifier for requesting establishment of a third bearer;
  • the bearer sends the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message.
  • the first identifier is a local identifier (local identifier, local ID) of the first terminal, a cell radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI), a 5G temporary mobile user identifier ( 5G S-temporary mobile subscriber identity, 5G-S-TMSI), or radio resource control transaction identifier (radio resource control transaction identifier, rrc-TransactionIdentifier), or layer 2 identifier (layer 2 identifier, L2 ID).
  • C-RNTI cell radio network temporary identifier
  • 5G temporary mobile user identifier 5G S-temporary mobile subscriber identity, 5G-S-TMSI
  • radio resource control transaction identifier radio resource control transaction identifier
  • layer 2 identifier layer 2 identifier, L2 ID
  • the first identifier can be directly the third identifier, which is used by the second terminal to distinguish the first terminal in the relay link.
  • the second terminal may determine the third identifier according to the first identifier, so as to achieve the purpose of distinguish
  • the third identifier is the local ID of the first terminal.
  • the second terminal can use the third identifier to distinguish the first terminal on the relay communication link based on the second terminal, and determine which one is forwarded.
  • the RRC connection reconfiguration completion message corresponding to the first terminal ensures that the second network device correctly completes the pairing between the newly accessed first terminal and the context of the first terminal reserved in advance.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which may be executed by a first terminal, and may also be executed by a component (for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) of the second terminal.
  • a component for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.
  • this The application embodiment is described by taking the method performed for the first terminal as an example, including: the first terminal receives the first RRC connection reconfiguration message sent by the first network device, and the first RRC connection reconfiguration message includes the first identifier, the second The identifier and the first indication information, wherein the first identifier is used to identify the first terminal, the first indication information is used to instruct the first terminal to switch the communication path, the second identifier is used to identify the second terminal, and the second terminal is The target terminal of the communication path switching; the first terminal sends a first message to the second terminal, where the first message includes the first identifier.
  • the second terminal can be made to identify the first terminal according to the first identifier reported by the first terminal, which is conducive to the subsequent determination of which RRC connection reconfiguration complete message corresponding to the first terminal is forwarded, and ensures that the second network device The pairing between the newly accessed first terminal and the context of the first terminal reserved in advance is correctly completed.
  • the first terminal sends the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the second network device through the second terminal.
  • the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message can be forwarded to the second network device through the second terminal, so as to implement the process of accessing the second network device based on the relay service of the second terminal.
  • the first terminal before the first terminal receives the first RRC connection reconfiguration message sent by the first network device, the first terminal sends a sixth message to the first network device, and the sixth message is sent to the first network device.
  • the message includes at least one second candidate identifier, where the second candidate identifier is used to identify a second candidate terminal, and the second candidate terminal is a candidate target terminal for the first terminal to perform communication path switching.
  • the sixth message may further include a cell identifier corresponding to at least one second candidate identifier, and relay communication link measurement information between the first terminal and the second candidate terminal.
  • a terminal can report the identity of at least one candidate target handover terminal and the corresponding cell identity and link measurement information to the first network device, which is helpful for the first network device to make a path switching decision.
  • the first identifier is local ID, C-RNTI, 5G-S-TMSI, or rrc-TransactionIdentifier.
  • the first identifier can be directly the third identifier, which is used by the second terminal to distinguish the first terminal in the relay link.
  • the second terminal may determine the third identifier according to the first identifier, so as to achieve the purpose of distinguishing the first terminal in the relay link.
  • the first network device and the second network device are the same or different network devices.
  • the first terminal and the second terminal may access the same network device or different network devices.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method may be executed by a first network device, and may also be executed by a component of the first network device (for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.).
  • the embodiment of the present application introduces the method for the first network device as an example, including: the first network device receives a fifth message sent by the second network device, the fifth message includes a first RRC connection reconfiguration message, the first An RRC connection reconfiguration message includes a second identifier and first indication information, where the first indication information is used to instruct the first terminal to switch the communication path, the second identifier is used to identify the second terminal, and the second terminal is the communication path The target terminal of the path switching; the first RRC connection reconfiguration message carries a first identifier, and the first identifier is used to identify the first terminal.
  • the first network device sends the first RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first terminal.
  • the first network device after receiving the switching instruction from the second network device, the first network device sends a first RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first terminal device to instruct the first terminal to perform path switching.
  • the first terminal can obtain the first identifier for identifying itself, and further, it is helpful for the subsequent second terminal and the second network device to maintain the first identifier.
  • the first network device receives a sixth message sent by the first terminal, where the sixth message includes at least one second candidate identifier, and the relationship between the first terminal and the second candidate terminal is Relaying communication link measurement information, the second candidate identifier is used to identify the second candidate terminal, and the second candidate terminal is a candidate target terminal for the first terminal to perform communication path switching; optionally, the first terminal
  • the six messages may include a cell identity corresponding to the at least one second candidate identity.
  • the first network device determines the second identity among the at least one second candidate identity.
  • the first terminal can report the identity of the target switching terminal and the corresponding link measurement information to the first network device, which is helpful for the first network device to make a decision on path switching.
  • the first identifier is local ID, C-RNTI, 5G-S-TMSI, or rrc-TransactionIdentifier.
  • the first network device sends the first RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first terminal carrying the first identifier, which is used by the first terminal to determine the identifier for distinguishing itself, where the first identifier may be directly the third identifier.
  • the identifier is used to facilitate the subsequent second terminal to distinguish the first terminal in the relay link.
  • the second terminal can subsequently determine the third identifier according to the first identifier, so as to achieve the purpose of distinguishing the first terminal in the relay link.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method may be executed by a second network device, or may be executed by a component (for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) of the second network device.
  • a component for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.
  • the embodiments of the present application are described by taking the method being executed for a second network device as an example, including: the second network device receives a fourth message sent by the first network device, where the fourth message includes a second identifier, and the second identifier is used for Identifies the second terminal, where the second terminal is a terminal within the coverage of the second network device, and the fourth message is used to request the first terminal to access the second network device through the relay service of the second terminal;
  • the second network device sends a fifth message to the first network device, where the fifth message includes a first RRC connection reconfiguration message, and the first RRC connection reconfiguration message includes a second identifier and first indication information, wherein the first indication information It is used to instruct the first terminal to switch the communication path, and the second identifier is used to identify the second terminal, and the second terminal is the target terminal of the communication path switching.
  • the second network device after receiving the path switching request from the first network device, the second network device sends a request reply message to the first network device, where the reply message includes the handover indication, the first identifier of the first terminal and the handover target terminal , so that the process of the first terminal accessing to the second network device based on the communication service of the second terminal is further completed.
  • the second network device before the second network device sends the fifth message to the first network device, the second network device sends a second message to the second terminal, where the second message includes configuration information of the first bearer; the first The configuration information of the bearer is used by the second terminal to establish a first bearer, and the first bearer includes: a radio bearer between the second terminal and the first terminal for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal, and the second terminal and the second network. A radio bearer that transmits signaling and data of the first terminal between devices.
  • the second terminal can establish a bearer related to the relay communication link before forwarding the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message of the first terminal, that is, the first bearer can be established in advance, so that the second terminal receives the first bearer.
  • the first bearer can be established in advance, so that the second terminal receives the first bearer.
  • the first message sent by a terminal it can directly send the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the second network device through the first bearer, thereby reducing the large communication delay or even communication interruption caused by the establishment of the second terminal bearer, ensuring that Low latency for communication.
  • the second message further includes the first identifier.
  • carrying the first identifier in the second message helps the second terminal to know the identifier of the first terminal in advance.
  • the second terminal establishes a unicast connection with the first terminal and receives the first message sent by the first terminal After that, it can be determined that the accessed first terminal is the terminal that the second network device instructed to switch and reserved the context before, so as to ensure that the second network device correctly completes the relationship between the newly accessed first terminal and the context of the first terminal reserved in advance. pairing between.
  • the second message further includes fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the second terminal is the target terminal of the communication path switching of the first terminal; the second network device receives the second terminal.
  • the third identifier sent by the device, where the third identifier is allocated by the second terminal according to the fourth indication information, and the first identifier in the fifth message is the third identifier.
  • the second terminal when the second terminal establishes a unicast connection with the first terminal and receives the first terminal After the first message is sent, it can be determined through the third identifier that the first terminal accessing this access is the terminal that the second network device instructed to switch and that has retained the context, ensuring that the second network device correctly completes the newly accessed first terminal and the terminal.
  • a pairing between the contexts of the first terminal reserved in advance.
  • the second message only includes fourth indication information, that is, in this implementation manner, the above-mentioned first bearer is not established.
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the second terminal is the target terminal of the communication path switching of the first terminal.
  • the second network device receives the third identifier sent by the second terminal device, where the third identifier is allocated by the second terminal according to the fourth indication information, and the first identifier in the fifth message is the third identifier.
  • the second terminal can assign the third identifier corresponding to the first terminal according to the fourth indication information, so that the second terminal and the second network device can acquire and maintain the third identifier.
  • the second terminal After establishing a unicast connection with the first terminal and receiving the first message sent by the first terminal, it can be determined through the third identifier that the first terminal accessing this access is the terminal that the second network device instructed to switch and retain the context, ensuring that The second network device correctly completes the pairing between the newly accessed first terminal and the context of the first terminal reserved in advance.
  • the second network device receives the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message of the first terminal forwarded by the second terminal, and carries a third identifier when forwarding the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message,
  • the third identifier is used to identify the first terminal in the relay communication link based on the second terminal, and is associated with the first identifier.
  • the first identifier is directly the third identifier, for example, the first identifier is directly the local ID of the first terminal.
  • the first identifier and the third identifier have a corresponding relationship or an association relationship, that is, the third identifier can be determined according to the first identifier.
  • the first identifier is the C-RNTI, 5G-S-TMSI, or rrc-TransactionIdentifier corresponding to the first terminal.
  • the third identifier is the local ID of the first terminal.
  • the second network device can distinguish which RRC connection reconfiguration complete message corresponding to the first terminal is received according to the third identifier, so that the second network can identify the third identifier and find the previously maintained first terminal through the first identifier.
  • the context of the first terminal can distinguish which RRC connection reconfiguration complete message corresponding to the first terminal is received according to the third identifier, so that the second network can identify the third identifier and find the previously maintained first terminal through the first identifier.
  • the existence of an association relationship between the third identifier and the first identifier includes: the second network device receives the first identifier sent by the second terminal, and the second network device determines the first identifier according to the first identifier as the first identifier.
  • a terminal assigns a third identifier, and sends the association relationship between the third identifier and the first identifier to the second terminal.
  • the existence of an association relationship between the third identifier and the first identifier includes: the second terminal assigns the third identifier according to the first identifier, and sends the association between the first identifier and the third identifier to the second network device. relation.
  • the second network device before receiving the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message, can determine the association relationship between the first identifier and the third identifier, which is beneficial to maintain the third identifier between the second terminal and the second network device. identification, so that the first network device can identify the context of the first terminal maintained by the first identification before the third identification is found.
  • the existence of an association relationship between the third identifier and the first identifier includes: the second network device receiving the L2 of the first terminal sent by the second terminal. ID, the second network device allocates a third identifier to the first terminal according to the L2 ID, and sends the association relationship between the third identifier and the L2 ID to the second terminal; The L2 ID allocates a third identification, and sends the association relationship between the L2 ID and the third identification to the second network device.
  • the second network device when it receives the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message, it can identify the first identifier and the third identifier at the same time, which is beneficial to maintain the third identifier between the second terminal and the second network device.
  • the first network device is enabled to identify the context of the first terminal maintained by the first identification before the third identification is found.
  • the second network device receives the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message of the first terminal forwarded by the second terminal, and receives a third identifier carried when forwarded by the second terminal, where the third identifier is the same as the The first identifier has an associated relationship; the second network device sends a second RRC connection reconfiguration message to the second terminal, where the second RRC connection reconfiguration message carries the third identifier.
  • the second network device instructs the second terminal to perform RRC connection reconfiguration by sending the second RRC connection reconfiguration message to the second terminal.
  • the bearer associated with the relay communication link is established. That is, the second terminal may also establish a bearer related to the relay communication link after forwarding the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message of the first terminal.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method.
  • the method may be executed by a first network device, or may be executed by a component (for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) of the three network devices.
  • a component for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.
  • This embodiment of the present application is described by taking the implementation of the method for the first network device as an example, including: the first network device receives a sixth message sent by the first terminal, where the sixth message includes at least one second candidate identifier, the first The two candidate identifiers are used to identify a second candidate terminal, and the second candidate terminal is a candidate target terminal for the first terminal to perform communication path switching.
  • the sixth message may further include at least one second candidate identifier.
  • Corresponding cell identifier relay communication link measurement information between the first terminal and the second candidate terminal.
  • the first network device sends a first RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first terminal device, where the first RRC connection reconfiguration message includes the first identifier, the second identifier and first indication information, wherein the first indication
  • the information is used to instruct the first terminal to switch the communication path
  • the second identifier is used to identify the second terminal
  • the second terminal is the target terminal of the first terminal to perform the path switch
  • the first identifier is used to Identify the first terminal.
  • the first network device assigns the first identification to the first terminal, and the first terminal obtains the first identification capable of identifying itself, which is beneficial for the subsequent second terminal to achieve the purpose of identifying the first terminal through the identification.
  • the first network device determines the second identifier from the at least one second candidate identifier. Through this implementation manner, the first network device determines, from at least one candidate second terminal reported by the first terminal, a target terminal for the first terminal to perform path switching.
  • the first network device receives the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message from the first terminal and forwarded by the second terminal.
  • the first network device determines, according to the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message, that the first terminal completes the RRC connection reconfiguration.
  • the first network device before the first network device receives the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message, the first network device receives the association between the first identifier and the third identifier sent by the second terminal device. relationship, the third identifier is used to identify the first terminal in the relay link based on the second terminal; or,
  • the first network device allocates the third identifier according to the first identifier, and the first network device sends the association relationship between the first identifier and the third identifier to the first terminal.
  • the second terminal determines the third identifier before forwarding the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message, which is beneficial to maintain the third identifier between the second terminal and the first network device, so that the first network device can identify
  • the third identifier finds the context of the first terminal previously maintained by the first identifier.
  • the method for the first network device to determine the association relationship between the third identifier and the first identifier includes: the first network device receives the second terminal. The L2 ID of the first terminal sent, the first network device allocates a third identification for the first terminal according to the L2 ID, and sends the association relationship between the third identification and the L2 ID to the second terminal; The second terminal allocates the third identification according to the L2 ID of the first terminal, and sends the association relationship between the L2 ID and the third identification to the first network device.
  • the first network device when the first network device receives the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message, it can identify the first identifier and the third identifier at the same time, which is beneficial to maintain the third identifier between the second terminal and the first network device.
  • the first network device is enabled to identify the context of the first terminal maintained by the first identification before the third identification is found.
  • the first network device before the first network device sends the first RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first terminal, the first network device sends a second message to the second terminal, so the The second message includes configuration information of the first bearer, and the configuration information of the first bearer is used by the second terminal to establish the first bearer, and the first bearer includes: the second terminal and the first bearer.
  • a radio bearer between a terminal for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal and a radio bearer between the second terminal and the first network device for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal .
  • the first bearer can be established in advance, so that after receiving the first message sent by the first terminal, the second terminal can directly send the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the first network device through the first bearer, thereby reducing the risk of The second terminal bears the large communication delay or even the communication interruption introduced by the establishment to ensure low communication delay.
  • the second message further includes the first identifier.
  • the second terminal can know the identifier of the first terminal in advance, and when the second terminal establishes a unicast connection with the first terminal and receives the first message sent by the first terminal, it can determine the first terminal of the access.
  • a terminal is a terminal for which the first network device instructs to switch and reserves the context, which ensures that the first network device correctly completes the pairing between the newly accessed first terminal and the context of the first terminal reserved in advance.
  • the second message further includes fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the second terminal is the target terminal of the communication path switching of the first terminal;
  • the first network device receives the third identifier sent by the second terminal.
  • the first bearer can be established in advance, the large communication delay or even the communication interruption caused by the establishment of the second terminal bearer can be reduced, the low communication delay can be ensured, and the second terminal can determine itself as the first bearer.
  • the second terminal when the second terminal establishes a unicast connection with the first terminal and receives the first message sent by the first terminal Afterwards, it can be determined by the third identifier that the first terminal accessing this access is the terminal that the first network device instructed to switch and the context was reserved before, so as to ensure that the first network device correctly completes the newly accessed first terminal and the first terminal reserved in advance. Pairing between the contexts of the terminal.
  • the second message only includes fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the second terminal is the target terminal of the communication path switching of the first terminal.
  • the second terminal allocates the third identifier according to the fourth indication information, and the second terminal device sends the third identifier to the first network device, and the first identifier in the first message is the third identifier.
  • the second terminal can assign the third identifier corresponding to the first terminal according to the fourth indication information, so that the second terminal and the first network device can acquire and maintain the third identifier.
  • the second terminal After establishing a unicast connection with the first terminal and receiving the first message sent by the first terminal, it can be determined through the third identifier that the first terminal accessing this access is the terminal that the first network device instructed to switch and retain the context, ensuring that The first network device correctly completes the pairing between the newly accessed first terminal and the context of the first terminal reserved in advance.
  • the first network device sends a second RRC connection reconfiguration message to the second terminal, where the second RRC connection reconfiguration message carries the third identifier.
  • the second terminal establishes a bearer related to the relay link.
  • the first identifier is local ID, C-RNTI, 5G-S-TMSI, or rrc-TransactionIdentifier
  • the second identifier is C-RNTI
  • the third identifier is local ID
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method may be executed by a first terminal, and may also be executed by a component (for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) of the second terminal.
  • a component for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.
  • the application embodiment is described by taking the method for the first terminal as an example, including: the first terminal sends a sixth message to the first network device, the sixth message includes a first identifier, at least one second candidate identifier, the The first identifier is used to identify the first terminal, the second candidate identifier is used to identify the second candidate terminal, and the second candidate terminal is a candidate target terminal for the first terminal to perform communication path switching, optional , the sixth message may further include a cell identifier corresponding to at least one second candidate identifier, and relay communication link measurement information between the first terminal and the second candidate terminal.
  • the first terminal receives a first RRC connection reconfiguration message sent by the first network device, where the first RRC connection reconfiguration message includes a second identifier and first indication information, where the first indication information is used to instruct the first terminal to communicate Path switching, the second identifier is used to identify the second terminal, and the second terminal is the target terminal for the first terminal to switch the communication path; the first terminal sends the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the second network device through the second terminal.
  • the second terminal can be made to identify the first terminal according to the first identifier reported by the first terminal, determine which RRC connection reconfiguration completion message corresponding to the first terminal is forwarded, and ensure that the second network device correctly completes the new RRC connection reconfiguration message.
  • the first identifier is the L2 ID of the first terminal.
  • the first network device determines the first identifier and reports it to the first network device, so as to ensure that the second terminal identifies and forwards the RRC connection reconfiguration complete message corresponding to the first terminal.
  • the first network device and the second network device are the same or different network devices, that is, before the communication path switching, the first network device corresponding to the first terminal and the second network device corresponding to the second terminal
  • the network devices may be the same network device or different network devices.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method may be executed by a first network device, and may also be executed by a component (for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) of the first network device.
  • a component for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.
  • the embodiment of the present application takes the method for the first network device as an example to introduce, including: the first network device receives a sixth message sent by the first terminal, where the sixth message includes a first identifier, at least one second candidate identifier, the first identifier is used to identify the first terminal, the second candidate identifier is used to identify the second candidate terminal, and the second candidate terminal is a candidate target terminal for the first terminal to perform communication path switching , optionally, the sixth message may further include a cell identifier corresponding to at least one second candidate identifier, and relay communication link measurement information between the first terminal and the second candidate terminal.
  • the first network device sends a fourth message to the second network device, where the fourth message includes the first identifier and a second identifier, the second identifier is used to identify the second terminal, and the second The terminal is a target terminal for the first terminal to switch the communication path.
  • the first network device reports the handover request to the second network device and carries the first identifier, which is beneficial to realize that the first terminal accesses the second network device based on the relay service of the second terminal.
  • the first network device determines the second identifier from the at least one second candidate identifier. Through this implementation manner, the first network device determines, from at least one candidate second terminal reported by the first terminal, a target terminal for the first terminal to perform path switching.
  • the first identifier is the L2 ID of the first terminal.
  • the first terminal determines the first identifier and reports it to the first network device, so as to ensure that the second terminal identifies and forwards the RRC connection reconfiguration complete message corresponding to the first terminal.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method may be executed by a second network device, and may also be executed by a component (for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) of the second network device.
  • a component for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.
  • the embodiments of the present application are described by taking the method being executed for a second network device as an example, including: the second network device receives a fourth message sent by the first network device, where the fourth message includes a first identifier and a second identifier, the first An identifier is used to identify the first terminal, the second identifier is used to identify the second terminal, and the second terminal is the target terminal for the first terminal to switch the communication path; the second network device sends a fifth message to the first network device, the first The fifth message includes a first RRC connection reconfiguration message, and the first RRC connection reconfiguration message includes a second identifier and first indication information, wherein the first indication information is used to instruct the first terminal to perform communication path switching, and the second identifier is used for for identifying the second terminal, the second terminal being the target terminal of the communication path switching.
  • the second network device receives the first identifier of the first terminal and the second identifier of the target terminal of the path switching reported by the first network device, and determines to instruct the first terminal to perform the path switching.
  • the first identifier is helpful for the second network device to maintain the context of the first terminal, so that when the first terminal accesses the second network device through the second terminal, the second network device can identify and match the first terminal through the first identifier. maintained context.
  • the first identifier is helpful for the second network device to maintain the context of the first terminal, so that when the first terminal accesses the second network device through the second terminal, the second network device can identify and match the first terminal through the first identifier. maintained context.
  • the second network device after the second network device sends the fifth message to the first network device, the second network device receives the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message of the first terminal forwarded by the second terminal. Through this implementation manner, the second network device determines, according to the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message, that the first terminal has completed the RRC connection reconfiguration.
  • the second network device receives the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message of the first terminal forwarded by the second terminal, and receives a third identifier carried when forwarded by the second terminal, where the third identifier is used is used to identify the first terminal in the relay communication link based on the second terminal, and has an associated relationship with the first identification.
  • the first identifier and the third identifier have a corresponding relationship or an association relationship, that is, the third identifier can be determined according to the first identifier.
  • the first identifier is the L2 ID corresponding to the first terminal.
  • the third identifier is the local ID of the first terminal.
  • the second network device can distinguish, according to the third identifier, which RRC connection reconfiguration complete message corresponding to the first terminal is received.
  • the second network device determines that the third identifier and the first identifier have an associated relationship before receiving the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message.
  • the third identifier and the first identifier exist.
  • the association relationship includes: the second network device receives the first identification sent by the second terminal, the second network device allocates a third identification to the first terminal according to the first identification, and sends the third identification and the first identification to the second terminal relationship between.
  • the second network device determines that the third identifier has an associated relationship with the first identifier, and the third identifier has an associated relationship with the first identifier including: The second terminal allocates the third identifier according to the first identifier, and sends the association relationship between the first identifier and the third identifier to the second network device.
  • the second network device before receiving the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message, can determine the association relationship between the first identifier and the third identifier, which is beneficial to maintain the third identifier between the second terminal and the second network device. logo.
  • the second network device before the second network device sends the fifth message to the first network device, the second network device sends a second message to the second terminal, where the second message includes the configuration information of the first bearer and the first identification; the configuration information of the first bearer is used by the second terminal to establish the first bearer, and the first bearer includes: a radio bearer between the second terminal and the first terminal that transmits the signaling and data of the first terminal, and the second terminal A radio bearer that transmits signaling and data of the first terminal with the second network device.
  • the second terminal can establish a bearer related to the relay communication link before forwarding the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message of the first terminal, that is, the first bearer can be established in advance, reducing the need for the second terminal to establish a bearer
  • the introduced large communication delay or even communication interruption ensures low communication delay.
  • the second message further includes the first identifier. Through this implementation, carrying the first identifier in the second message is helpful for the second terminal to determine which first terminal is to be accessed.
  • the second network device after the second network device receives the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message of the first terminal forwarded by the second terminal, and receives the third identifier carried when forwarded by the second terminal, the second network device sends the message to the second terminal.
  • the second terminal sends a second RRC connection reconfiguration message, where the second RRC connection reconfiguration message carries the third identifier.
  • the second network device instructs the second terminal to perform RRC connection reconfiguration by sending the second RRC connection reconfiguration message to the second terminal.
  • the bearer associated with the relay communication link is established. That is, the second terminal may also establish a bearer related to the relay communication link after forwarding the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message of the first terminal.
  • the first identifier is the L2 ID of the first terminal
  • the third identifier is the local ID of the first terminal.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method may be executed by a first network device, and may also be executed by a component (for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) of the first network device.
  • a component for example, a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.
  • the embodiment of the present application takes the method for the first network device as an example to introduce, including: the first network device receives a sixth message sent by the first terminal, where the sixth message includes a first identifier, at least one second candidate identifier, the second candidate identifier is used to identify the second candidate terminal, and the second candidate terminal is the second identifier of the candidate target terminal for the first terminal to perform communication path switching, and the first identifier is used to identify the
  • the sixth message may further include a cell identifier corresponding to at least one second candidate identifier, and relay communication link measurement information between the first terminal and the second candidate terminal.
  • the first network device sends a first RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first terminal, where the first RRC connection reconfiguration message includes a second identifier and first indication information, where the first indication information is used for
  • the first terminal is instructed to switch the communication path, and the second identifier is used to identify the second terminal, and the second terminal is the target terminal of the first terminal to switch the communication path.
  • the first network device receives the first identifier reported by the first terminal, and instructs the first terminal device to switch to the first network device based on the relay service of the second terminal.
  • the first network device compares the direct link channel reference signal received power (reference signal received power, RSRP), the side link RSRP, and the magnitude relationship between the preset RSRP thresholds to determine the Second logo.
  • the first network device determines, from at least one candidate second terminal reported by the first terminal, a target terminal for the first terminal to perform path switching.
  • the first network device receives a first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message from the first terminal forwarded by the second terminal.
  • the first network device determines, according to the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message, that the first terminal completes the RRC connection reconfiguration.
  • the first network device receives the association relationship between the first identifier and the third identifier sent by the second terminal device, where the third identifier is used to identify all the identifiers in the relay link based on the second terminal. the first terminal; or,
  • the first network device allocates the third identifier according to the first identifier, and the first network device sends the association relationship between the first identifier and the third identifier to the first terminal.
  • the second terminal determines the third identifier before forwarding the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message, which is beneficial to maintain the third identifier between the second terminal and the first network device, so that the first network device can identify
  • the third identifier finds the context of the first terminal previously maintained by the first identifier.
  • the first network device before the first network device sends the first RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first terminal, the first network device sends a second message to the second terminal, the The second message includes configuration information of the first bearer and the first identifier, the configuration information of the first bearer is used by the second terminal to establish the first bearer, and the first bearer includes: the second The radio bearer between the terminal and the first terminal for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal, and the signaling between the second terminal and the first network device for transmitting the signaling of the first terminal and radio bearer of data.
  • the first bearer can be established in advance based on the configuration information of the first bearer, thereby reducing the large communication delay or even communication interruption caused by the establishment of the second terminal bearer, and ensuring low communication delay; based on the second message
  • the first identifier in the first terminal enables the second terminal to know the identifier of the first terminal in advance.
  • the second terminal establishes a unicast connection with the first terminal and receives the first message sent by the first terminal, it can determine the first terminal of the access.
  • a terminal is a terminal for which the first network device instructs to switch and reserves the context, which ensures that the first network device correctly completes the pairing between the newly accessed first terminal and the context of the first terminal reserved in advance.
  • the first network device sends a second RRC connection reconfiguration message to the second terminal, where the second RRC connection reconfiguration message carries the third identifier.
  • the second terminal establishes a bearer related to the relay link.
  • the first identification is L2 ID
  • the second identification is C-RNTI
  • the third identification is local ID.
  • the first terminal determines the first identifier and reports it to the first network device, so as to ensure that the second terminal identifies and forwards the RRC connection reconfiguration complete message corresponding to the first terminal.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, where the device may be a first terminal, and may also be a component (processor, chip, or chip system) of the first terminal.
  • the apparatus has the function of implementing the second aspect, or the sixth aspect, or each possible implementation method of the second aspect, or each possible implementation method of the sixth aspect. This function can be implemented by hardware or by executing corresponding software by hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication apparatus, where the apparatus may be a second terminal, and may also be a component (processor, chip, or chip system) used for the second terminal.
  • the apparatus has the function of implementing the above-mentioned first aspect, or each possible implementation method of the first aspect. This function can be implemented by hardware or by executing corresponding software by hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication apparatus, where the apparatus may be a first network device, and may also be a component (processor, chip, or chip system) used for the first network device.
  • the device has the function of implementing the third aspect, the fifth aspect, or the seventh aspect or the ninth aspect or each possible implementation method corresponding to the foregoing aspect. This function can be implemented by hardware or by executing corresponding software by hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication apparatus, where the apparatus may be a second network device, and may also be a component (processor, chip, or chip system) used for the second network device.
  • the apparatus has the function of implementing the fourth aspect, the eighth aspect, or each possible implementation method corresponding to the foregoing aspect. This function can be implemented by hardware or by executing corresponding software by hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store computer-executed instructions, and when the device is running, the processor executes the computer-executed instructions stored in the memory, to The apparatus is caused to perform the method of the first aspect, the second aspect or the sixth aspect, or any of the possible implementation methods of the first aspect, the second aspect or the sixth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store computer-executed instructions, and when the device is running, the processor executes the computer-executed instructions stored in the memory to
  • the apparatus is made to perform the methods of the third to fifth aspects or the seventh to ninth aspects, any of the possible implementation methods of the third to fifth aspects or the seventh to ninth aspects.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including the methods for performing the above-mentioned first aspect to the third aspect, and each operation of any method among the possible implementation methods of the first aspect to the ninth aspect units or means.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including a processor and an interface circuit, where the processor is configured to communicate with other devices through the interface circuit, and execute the first aspect, the second aspect, or the sixth aspect.
  • a method any of the possible implementation methods of the first aspect, the second aspect or the sixth aspect.
  • the processor includes one or more.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including a processor and an interface circuit, where the processor is configured to communicate with other devices through the interface circuit, and execute the above-mentioned third to fifth aspects or seventh to ninth aspects
  • the method any of the possible implementation methods of the third to fifth aspects or the seventh to ninth aspects.
  • the processor includes one or more.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including a processor, which is connected to a memory and used to call a program stored in the memory to execute the first aspect, the second aspect, or the sixth aspect.
  • the method any of the possible implementation methods of the first aspect, the second aspect or the sixth aspect.
  • the memory may be located within the device or external to the device.
  • the processor includes one or more.
  • embodiments of the present application further provide a computer-readable storage medium, where instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer-readable storage medium is run on a computer, the processor causes the processor to execute the third to fifth aspects or The methods of the seventh to ninth aspects, any of the possible implementation methods of the third to fifth aspects or the seventh to ninth aspects.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product, the computer product includes a computer program, when the computer program runs, the method of the first aspect, the second aspect or the sixth aspect, the first aspect Any of the possible implementation methods of the second aspect or the sixth aspect is performed.
  • embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program product, the computer product includes a computer program, when the computer program runs, the methods of the third to fifth aspects or the seventh to ninth aspects above, the third Any of the possible implementation methods of the fifth to fifth aspects or the seventh to ninth aspects are performed.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a chip system, including: a processor configured to execute the method of the first aspect, the second aspect or the sixth aspect, the first aspect, the second aspect or the sixth aspect Any of possible implementations of an aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a chip system, including: a processor configured to execute the methods of the third to fifth aspects or the seventh to ninth aspects, the third to fifth aspects or the seventh to Any of the possible implementation methods of the ninth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, including: the communication devices described in the tenth aspect, the eleventh aspect, and the twelfth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, including: the communication devices described in the tenth aspect, the eleventh aspect, the twelfth aspect, and the thirteenth aspect.
  • FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram of a network architecture to which an embodiment of the present application is applied;
  • FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of a network architecture to which an embodiment of the present application is applied;
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of switching from direct communication to indirect communication
  • FIG. 3 provides a schematic diagram of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 provides a schematic diagram of another communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 provides a schematic diagram of another communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 provides a schematic diagram of another communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 provides a schematic diagram of another communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 provides a schematic diagram of another communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a terminal according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1A it is a schematic diagram of a communication system 100 to which the embodiments of the present application are applied, including at least two terminals 111 and 112 and at least one network device 101 .
  • the terminal 111 may communicate with the network device 101 through a wireless interface (eg, a Uu interface). Direct communication can be performed between the terminal 111 and the terminal 112, for example, through a PC5 interface between the terminals.
  • a link between terminals may be called a side link, or a side link, or a side link, or a PC5 interface link, or an inter-terminal link.
  • the terminal 111 switches from direct communication with the network device 101 to communicating with the network device 101 through the terminal 112 .
  • the communication system 100 further includes a network device 102 , the terminal 112 communicates with the network device 102 , and the network device 101 and the network device 102 can interact.
  • Terminal 111 switches from direct communication with network device 101 to communicating with network device 102 through terminal 112 .
  • a terminal is a device with wireless transceiver function, which can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld or vehicle; it can also be deployed on water (such as ships, etc.); it can also be deployed in the air (such as aircraft) , balloons, satellites, etc.).
  • the terminal may be a user equipment (user equipment), a mobile phone (mobile phone), a tablet computer (pad), a computer with a wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) terminal, an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) terminal , wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, transportation security wireless terminals in safety), wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, user equipment (UE), etc.
  • direct communication is supported between terminals and terminals, and direct communication between terminals may also be referred to as side link (side link) communication or device to device (device to device) communication.
  • a network device is a device that provides wireless communication functions for terminals.
  • Network devices include but are not limited to: the next generation base station (g nodeB, gNB) in the fifth generation (5th generation, 5G), the evolved node B (evolved node B) B, eNB), radio network controller (RNC), node B (node B, NB), base station controller (BSC), base transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), home base station (For example, home evolved nodeB, or home node B, HNB), baseband unit (baseBand unit, BBU), transmission point (transmitting and receiving point, TRP), transmitting point (transmitting point, TP), mobile switching center, etc.
  • the logical system of network equipment can adopt the separation mode of centralized unit (CU) and distributed unit (DU).
  • the CU-DU logic system can be divided into two types, namely the CU-DU separation architecture and the CU-DU fusion architecture.
  • the functions of the protocol stack can be dynamically configured and divided, some of which are implemented in the CU, and the rest are implemented in the DU.
  • 3GPP 3rd generation partnership project
  • the logical functions of the CU and DU are integrated into the same network device to implement all the functions of the protocol stack.
  • Source base station a network device connected to the core network, the network device currently provides communication services for the remote terminal, that is, the source base station is the base station where the remote terminal resides.
  • the source base station may also be referred to as the first network device.
  • Target base station a network device connected to the core network.
  • the network device currently provides communication services for the relay terminal, that is, the target base station is the base station where the relay terminal resides.
  • the target base station may also be referred to as a second network device.
  • Relay UE a terminal with relay service function. Other terminals can communicate with network equipment through relay terminals.
  • the relay terminal may also be referred to as a second terminal.
  • Remote UE A terminal that accepts relay services.
  • the remote terminal communicates with the network device through the relay terminal, and there is a side link connection between the remote terminal and the relay terminal.
  • the remote terminal may also be referred to as a remote terminal or a first terminal.
  • Direct communication The terminal communicates directly with the network device.
  • the remote terminal communicates with the network device through the relay terminal.
  • Communication path switching when the communication environment of the terminal changes, the terminal switches the communication path to realize communication through the new communication path. Communication path switching may also be referred to as communication link switching.
  • terminals switch communication paths according to different communication requirements.
  • the mobility management of the terminal in the connected state is controlled by the network device, that is, the network device sends a handover message to instruct the terminal to which cell to switch to and how to perform the switch.
  • the communication path switching process also introduces more scenarios, including the remote terminal (remote UE) shown in FIG. 1A and FIG. The communication is switched to the scenario based on relay UE communication. Therefore, it is necessary to design the communication path switching process according to the complex communication requirements of the terminal to ensure the accuracy of the communication path switching and the low communication delay.
  • FIG. 2 it is a schematic flowchart of switching from direct communication to indirect communication (direct to indirect) under a layer 2 relay (L2relay) architecture. Includes the following actions:
  • the source base station sends measurement configuration information to the remote UE.
  • the measurement configuration information is used for the remote UE to perform measurement.
  • the remote UE performs a relay discovery process.
  • the remote UE satisfies the triggering condition of the relay UE discovery (Relay Discovery) process
  • the remote UE performs the relay discovery process, discovers the surrounding relay UEs through the discovery process, and obtains the cell radio network temporary identity of the relay UE.
  • identifier, C-RNTI) and the serving cell identifier (Cell ID) corresponding to the relay UE, and simultaneously measure and obtain the channel quality information between the relay UE and the relay UE.
  • the remote UE sends a measurement report to the source base station, where the measurement report carries the relay communication link measurement information with the relay UE, including the C-RNTI of the relay UE, the cell identifier where the relay UE is located, and the channel with the relay UE quality information.
  • the source base station determines, according to the measurement report, to switch the communication link of the remote UE to the relay communication link passing through the target relay UE.
  • the source base station After receiving the measurement report, the source base station determines the target relay UE based on certain rules, and the target relay UE is the target relay terminal with which the remote UE will establish a connection.
  • the source base station identifies the serving cell identifier of the relay UE in the measurement report, and sends a handover request message to the target base station, where the message carries the C-RNTI of the relay UE.
  • the target base station identifies the relay UE, and sends a handover request reply message to the source base station.
  • the message carries the indication information of the communication path switching of the remote UE, the radio bearer configuration information of the communication between the remote UE and the relay UE, and the remote UE and the target base station.
  • the configuration information of the PDCP layer communicated by the base station.
  • the source base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the remote UE, and the message carries the information in the handover request reply message.
  • the remote UE establishes a unicast connection with the relay UE, and completes the establishment of the radio bearer according to the content in the RRC connection reconfiguration message.
  • the target base station After receiving the RRC connection reconfiguration complete message replied by the remote UE, the target base station sends the RRC connection reconfiguration message to the relay UE to establish a radio bearer for transmitting the signaling and data of the remote UE between the relay UE and the remote UE, and A radio bearer for transmitting data and signaling of the remote UE between the relay UE and the target base station is established.
  • the remote UE is switched from direct communication to communication based on the relay terminal (relay UE), which satisfies the communication requirements of the remote UE.
  • the relay UE cannot identify the specific remote UE. Specifically, referring to Fig. 2, in S207, the relay UE cannot identify which remote UE the RRC connection reconfiguration complete message corresponds to during the forwarding process, resulting in that the target base station cannot complete the newly accessed remote UE and the reserved remote UE. Pairing between remote UE contexts.
  • the relay UE Since the relay UE cannot identify the specific remote UE when multiple remote UEs access the same relay UE at the same time, how does the relay UE determine the RRC connection reconfiguration completion message corresponding to the remote UE to be forwarded, and ensure that the target base station correctly completes the new RRC connection reconfiguration message.
  • the problem of pairing between the accessed remote UE and the remote UE context reserved in advance needs to be solved urgently.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a communication method. As shown in FIG. 3 , the method 300 includes the following operations:
  • the first terminal sends a first message to the second terminal, where the first message includes a first identifier, where the first identifier is used to identify the first terminal.
  • the second terminal receives the first message sent by the first terminal.
  • the first message may be a PC5-RRC message.
  • the first message is used to instruct the first terminal to perform communication path switching based on the second terminal.
  • the first message is sent after a unicast connection is completed between the first terminal and the second terminal, that is, after a sidelink is established between the first terminal and the second terminal.
  • the first message may be sent during the process of establishing a unicast connection between the first terminal and the second terminal. That is to say, during the process of establishing the unicast connection, the first terminal reports the first identifier to the second terminal through the first message. It is easy to understand that before this, the first terminal also needs to report the first identifier of the access stratum (access stratum) to the upper layer.
  • the first identifier may be a local identifier (local identifier, local ID) of the first terminal, a cell radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI), a 5G temporary mobile subscriber identity (5G S-temporary mobile subscriber identity, 5G-S-TMSI), or radio resource control transaction identifier (radio resource control transaction identifier, rrc-TransactionIdentifier), or layer 2 identifier (layer 2 identifier, L2 ID).
  • C-RNTI cell radio network temporary identifier
  • 5G S-temporary mobile subscriber identity 5G-S-TMSI
  • radio resource control transaction identifier radio resource control transaction identifier
  • layer 2 identifier layer 2 identifier, L2 ID
  • the first identifier in this embodiment is rrc-TransactionIdentifier
  • the first identifier is the identifier of the message between the first network device and the first terminal, but it needs to be between the second network device and the second terminal. It is also unique, that is, when the second network device allocates the rrc-TransactionIdentifier of the first RRC connection reconfiguration message, it cannot use it to communicate with the second terminal or other remote terminals relayed by the second terminal. rrc-TransactionIdentifier already used.
  • the second terminal forwards the first radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) connection reconfiguration complete message sent by the first terminal to the second network device according to the third identifier.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the second terminal forwards the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message sent by the first terminal to the second network device according to the third identifier. It can be understood that the second terminal forwards the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message sent by the first terminal to the second network device.
  • An RRC connection reconfiguration complete message carries a third identifier.
  • the first terminal sends a first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the second network device through the second terminal, and the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message is used to instruct the first terminal to complete the RRC connection reconfiguration, and the second terminal
  • a third identifier is carried when forwarding the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message. That is, the second terminal carries the third identifier when forwarding the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message sent by the first terminal to the second network device.
  • the third identifier is used to identify the first terminal in the relay communication link based on the second terminal, that is, the third identifier is a unique identifier used to identify the first terminal in the relay communication link.
  • the method 300 may further include:
  • the second terminal determines the third identifier.
  • the second terminal may determine the third identifier according to the first identifier in operation S306.
  • the third identifier is used to identify the first terminal in the relay link based on the second terminal device, for example, the third identifier is the local ID of the first terminal. Through the third identifier, the second terminal can distinguish which first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message corresponding to the first terminal is forwarded. It is easy to understand that the embodiment of the present application does not limit the second terminal to only determine the third identifier in operation S307, and the second terminal may determine the third identifier when receiving the first identifier of the first terminal.
  • Implementation mode 1 the first identifier is the third identifier.
  • the first identifier included in the first message is directly the third identifier, that is, the second terminal directly obtains the third identifier in the first message.
  • the first identifier is directly the third identifier.
  • Implementation mode 2 The second terminal allocates the third identifier according to the first identifier.
  • the second terminal allocates a third identity according to the first identity, where the first identity may be C-RNTI or 5G-S-TMSI.
  • the second terminal allocates the local ID corresponding to the first terminal to the first terminal according to the C-RNTI or 5G-S-TMSI of the first terminal, so as to distinguish the first terminal on the relay link based on the second terminal. terminal.
  • the second terminal After assigning the third identifier, the second terminal sends second indication information to the second network device, where the second indication information includes the association relationship between the first identifier and the third identifier.
  • the second indication information includes the association relationship between the first identifier and the third identifier.
  • assigning an identifier may also be understood as generating an identifier.
  • Implementation mode 3 The second terminal receives the third identifier allocated by the second network device.
  • the second terminal After receiving the first message, the second terminal reports the first identifier to the second network device, the second network device assigns a third identifier according to the first identifier, and sends the association relationship between the first identifier and the third identifier to the second terminal. terminal.
  • the third identifier is allocated by the second network device according to the first identifier after the first identifier is reported by the second terminal.
  • Implementation mode 4 The second terminal and the second network device allocate the third identifier according to the L2 ID of the first terminal.
  • the second terminal cannot resolve and identify the first identifier, and can maintain the third identifier with the second network device through the L2 ID of the first terminal. Specifically, it includes: the second terminal allocates a third identification according to the L2 ID, and sends second indication information to the second network device, where the second indication information includes the association relationship between the L2 ID and the third identification, through the second indication information, the second terminal device can specify the association relationship between the L2 ID of the first terminal and the third identifier; or, the second terminal sends the L2 ID of the first terminal to the second network device, and the second network device allocates the first terminal according to the L2 ID. Three identifications, and the association relationship between the L2 ID and the third identification is sent to the second terminal.
  • the optional method 300 further includes:
  • the second terminal receives a second message from the second network device, where the second message may be an RRC connection reconfiguration message, including configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the second terminal establishes a first bearer according to the configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the first bearer includes: a radio bearer between the second terminal and the first terminal for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal, and a radio bearer between the second terminal and the first terminal for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal.
  • a radio bearer for transmitting signaling and data of the first terminal between two network devices.
  • the second terminal sends a first bearer establishment complete message to the second network device, which is used to indicate that the establishment of the first bearer is completed.
  • the interruption time caused by the establishment of the second terminal bearer can be reduced, and the low delay of communication can be ensured.
  • the second message further includes the first identifier.
  • the second terminal may determine the third identifier according to the first identifier, and the specific implementation method may refer to the description in operation 306 .
  • This embodiment of the present application does not limit the timing for the second terminal to determine the third identifier according to the first identifier. That is to say, the second terminal may be determined in S306 or in S303, and it needs to be determined before operation 308. .
  • the second message further includes fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the second terminal is the target terminal of the communication path switching of the first terminal.
  • the fourth indication information may indicate that a new first terminal is about to access the second terminal.
  • the fourth indication information may indicate that a new remote UE is accessed, and the fourth indication information may also indicate that not only a new remote UE is being accessed, but may also carry the identifier of the remote UE, for example, the C corresponding to the remote UE -RNTI or local ID.
  • the second message only includes fourth indication information
  • the second network device indicates through the fourth indication information that the second terminal will have access to a new first terminal
  • the second terminal can use the fourth indication
  • the information determines the third identification.
  • the second terminal may determine the third identifier according to the fourth indication information, and the specific implementation method may refer to the description in operation 306 .
  • the difference is that the first identifier in operation 306 is replaced with the fourth indication information, and the embodiment of this application does not limit the timing for the second terminal to determine the third identifier according to the fourth indication information, that is, the second terminal. It can be determined in S306 or in S303, and it needs to be determined before operation 308.
  • the second terminal has various implementation manners to forward the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message sent by the first terminal to the second network device.
  • Manner 1 The second terminal forwards the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message through the first bearer. That is, the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message is carried on the first bearer between the second terminal and the second network device established in operation S303.
  • Manner 2 The second terminal forwards the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message through a preconfigured or preconfigured second bearer, and carries the third identifier when forwarding the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message. For example, the second terminal forwards the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message of the first terminal through a common signaling radio bearer (signaling radio bearer1, SRB) channel.
  • signaling radio bearer signaling radio bearer1, SRB
  • the second terminal forwards the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message through the third bearer.
  • the third method includes:
  • the second terminal sends a third bearer establishment request message to the second network device, where the third bearer establishment request message includes a third identifier for requesting establishment of a third bearer, and the second terminal forwards the first RRC connection reconfiguration through the third bearer Done message.
  • the second terminal reports the third identification (local ID) of the first terminal, and requests the second network device to establish an SRB channel dedicated to the first terminal, and then the second terminal forwards the first terminal on the SRB channel dedicated to the first terminal.
  • the second network device sends a second RRC connection reconfiguration message to the second terminal, where the second RRC connection reconfiguration message carries the third identifier.
  • the second network device sends a second RRC connection reconfiguration message to the second terminal, which is used to instruct the second terminal to establish a connection with the first terminal.
  • the radio bearer for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal between the two terminals and the radio bearer for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal between the second terminal and the second network device.
  • the second connection reconfiguration message may include a third identifier (eg, local ID) of the first terminal and related bearer configuration information, and the second terminal completes the establishment of the second terminal and the first terminal according to the related bearer configuration information.
  • the second network device receives a second RRC connection reconfiguration complete message sent by the second terminal, where the message is used to instruct the second terminal to complete the RRC connection reconfiguration.
  • operation S309 is an optional operation. If S303 has already achieved bearer establishment, operation 303 can be omitted. Otherwise, if operation S303 is not performed, operation S309 needs to be performed to realize bearer establishment.
  • this embodiment may further include:
  • the first terminal sends a sixth message to the first network device.
  • the first network device receives the sixth message, where the sixth message may be a measurement report message, where the sixth message may include at least one second candidate identifier, where the second candidate identifier is used to identify the second candidate terminal,
  • the second candidate terminal is a candidate target terminal for the first terminal to switch the communication path;
  • the sixth message may be the measurement report of the first terminal, which may include: the C-RNTI of the second candidate terminal and its serving cell identifier (Cell ID ) and/or relay communication link measurement information between the first terminal and the second candidate terminal.
  • Cell ID serving cell identifier
  • the first network device determines from at least one second candidate terminal to switch the communication link of the first terminal to the relay communication link through the second terminal according to the measurement report and a certain criterion.
  • the criterion may be that the channel reference signal received power (RSRP) of the direct communication link is lower than a certain threshold; or, the channel RSRP of the sidelink is higher than a certain threshold; or , the channel RSRP of the side link is greater than the channel RSRP of the direct communication link and exceeds a certain threshold.
  • the direct communication link is the link between the current first terminal and the first network device, and the side link is the link between the first terminal and the candidate terminal device.
  • the first network device determines, according to the identification of the serving cell of the second terminal, whether the serving cell of the second terminal is the own network device or an adjacent second network device. If it is a network device, operations S302 and S304 in the method 300 may be omitted, and other operations such as the functions of the second network device in S303 are implemented by the first network device. If it is the second network device, operations S302 and S304 are performed.
  • the first network device sends a fourth message to the second network device, where the fourth message may be a handover request message.
  • the first network device sends a fourth message to the second network device for requesting to switch the communication path of the first terminal to the second terminal, that is, the first terminal requests to access the first terminal through the relay service of the second terminal Two network devices, wherein the second terminal is a terminal within the coverage of the second network device.
  • the fourth message may include an identifier of the second terminal (eg, C-RNTI) and context information of the first terminal.
  • the second network device receives the fourth message, and identifies the first terminal and the second terminal according to the fourth message.
  • the second network device sends a fifth message to the first network device, where the fifth message may be a handover request confirmation message, the fifth message includes the first RRC connection reconfiguration message, and the first RRC connection reconfiguration message includes the second identifier and the first indication information, wherein the first indication information is used to instruct the first terminal to switch the communication path, the second identifier is used to identify the second terminal, the second terminal is the target terminal of the communication path switch, the first RRC connection
  • the reconfiguration message carries the first identifier.
  • the first indication information is used to instruct the first terminal to perform path switching.
  • the first identifier is used to identify the first terminal, where the first identifier may be local ID, C-RNTI, rrc-TransactionIdentifier or 5G-S-TMSI.
  • the second identifier is used to identify the second terminal, where the second identifier may be a C-RNTI.
  • the first identifier in this embodiment is rrc-TransactionIdentifier
  • the first identifier is the identifier of the message between the first network device and the first terminal, but it needs to be between the second network device and the second terminal.
  • the second network device cannot use the rrc-TransactionIdentifier of the first RRC message that has been used between it and the second terminal or other remote terminals relayed by the second terminal. rrc-TransactionIdentifier.
  • the fifth message may further include fourth bearer configuration information, where the fourth bearer configuration information includes radio bearer configuration information of the link between the first terminal and the second terminal, and/or the first terminal and the second terminal.
  • the fourth bearer configuration information is configuration information provided by the second network device to the first terminal through the first network device, and may include a radio link control (radio link control, RLC) bearer configuration between the first terminal and the second terminal, and An end-to-end packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) configuration between the first terminal and the second network device.
  • RLC radio link control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • the first network device receives the fifth message, and determines and instructs the first terminal to switch the communication path according to the fifth message.
  • the first network device sends a first RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first terminal, where the first RRC connection reconfiguration message includes a first identifier, a second identifier and first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate The first terminal performs communication path switching, and the second terminal is a target terminal for the first terminal to perform path switching.
  • the first identifier may be local ID, C-RNTI, rrc-TransactionIdentifier or 5G-S-TMSI.
  • the second identifier may be C-RNTI.
  • the first RRC connection reconfiguration message may further include fourth bearer configuration information.
  • the first terminal receives the first RRC connection reconfiguration message sent by the first network device, and the first terminal determines to perform communication path switching according to the first RRC connection reconfiguration message, that is, the first terminal uses the relay service of the second terminal. Access the second network device.
  • the first terminal establishes a radio bearer of the link between the first terminal and the second terminal according to the fourth bearer configuration information in the first RRC connection reconfiguration message, and/or the first terminal and the second network device The link between the radio bearers.
  • the first terminal may further establish an RLC bearer between the first terminal and the second terminal, and an end-to-end PDCP between the first terminal and the second network device.
  • the first terminal determines to send the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the second network device through the second terminal.
  • the identifier is determined by the first terminal, and finally the second terminal is determined.
  • the terminal can identify each first terminal, and assist the second network device to complete the pairing of the context of the newly accessed first terminal and the first terminal reserved in advance.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides another communication method 400, as shown in FIG. 4, the method includes the following operations:
  • the first terminal sends a sixth message to the first network device, where the sixth message may be a measurement report message.
  • the corresponding first network device receives the sixth message.
  • the sixth message may include a first identifier and at least one second candidate identifier, the second candidate identifier is used for a second candidate terminal, and the second candidate terminal is a candidate target terminal for the first terminal to perform communication path switching; optional , the sixth message may further include a cell identifier corresponding to at least one second candidate identifier, and relay communication link measurement information between the first terminal and the second candidate terminal.
  • the sixth message may be a measurement report of the first terminal.
  • the first identifier is used to identify the first terminal, for example, the first identifier is a layer 2 identifier (layer 2 identifier, L2 ID) of the first terminal. It can be understood that the first identifier and the measurement report may be sent in one message, or may be sent separately in multiple messages, which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application, as long as the first terminal reports the first terminal to the first terminal. Just one identification.
  • the measurement report may further include the C-RNTI of the second candidate terminal and its serving cell ID (Cell ID), and relay communication link measurement information between the first terminal and the second candidate terminal.
  • the first network device determines from at least one second candidate terminal to switch the communication link of the first terminal to the relay communication link through the second terminal according to the measurement report and a certain criterion.
  • the criterion may be that the channel reference signal received power (RSRP) of the direct communication link is lower than a certain threshold; or, the channel RSRP of the side link is higher than a certain threshold;
  • the channel RSRP of the uplink is greater than the channel RSRP of the direct communication link and exceeds a certain threshold.
  • the direct communication link is the link between the current first terminal and the first network device, and the side link is the link between the first terminal and the candidate terminal device.
  • the first network device determines, according to the identification of the serving cell of the second terminal, whether the serving cell of the second terminal is the own network device or an adjacent second network device. If it is a network device, operations S402 and S404 in the method 400 may be omitted, and other operations such as the functions of the second network device in S403 are implemented by the first network device.
  • the first network device sends a fourth message to the second network device, where the fourth message may be a handover request message.
  • the first network device sends a fourth message to the second network device for requesting to switch the communication path of the first terminal to the second terminal that can provide the relay service, that is, requesting the first terminal to pass the second terminal's communication path.
  • the relay service accesses the second network device, where the second terminal is a terminal within the coverage of the second network device.
  • the fourth message may include the second identifier of the second terminal (eg, C-RNTI), the context information of the first terminal, and the first identifier of the first terminal.
  • the second network device sends a fifth message to the first network device, where the fifth message may be a handover request confirmation message, the fifth message includes the first RRC connection reconfiguration message, and the first RRC connection reconfiguration message includes the first RRC connection reconfiguration message.
  • the second identification and the first indication information are included in the fifth message.
  • the first indication information is used to instruct the first terminal to perform path switching.
  • the second identifier is used to identify the second terminal, where the second terminal is the target terminal of the communication path switching.
  • the fifth message may further include fourth bearer configuration information, where the fourth bearer configuration information includes radio bearer configuration information of the link between the first terminal and the second terminal, and/or the first terminal and the second terminal.
  • the fourth bearer configuration information is configuration information provided by the second network device to the first terminal through the first network device, and may include the RLC bearer configuration between the first terminal and the second terminal, and the configuration between the first terminal and the second network device.
  • the end-to-end PDCP configuration is configured to the fifth message.
  • the first network device receives the fifth message, and determines and instructs the first terminal to switch the communication path according to the fifth message.
  • the first network device sends a first RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first terminal, where the first RRC connection reconfiguration message includes a second identifier and first indication information, where the first indication information is used to instruct the first terminal to perform In the communication path switching, the second terminal is the target terminal for the first terminal to perform the path switching. It can be understood that the first network device transparently transmits the first RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first terminal after receiving the first RRC connection reconfiguration message from the second network device.
  • the second identifier may be the C-RNTI of the second terminal.
  • the first RRC connection reconfiguration message may further include fourth bearer configuration information.
  • the first terminal receives the first RRC connection reconfiguration message sent by the first network device, and the first terminal determines to perform communication path switching according to the first RRC connection reconfiguration message, that is, the first terminal uses the relay service of the second terminal. Access the second network device.
  • the first terminal establishes a radio bearer of the link between the first terminal and the second terminal according to the fourth bearer configuration information in the first RRC connection reconfiguration message, and/or the first terminal and the second network device The link between the radio bearers.
  • the first terminal may further establish an RLC bearer between the first terminal and the second terminal, and an end-to-end PDCP between the first terminal and the second network device.
  • the first terminal determines to send the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the second network device through the second terminal.
  • the second terminal forwards the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message sent by the first terminal to the second network device.
  • the first terminal sends a first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the second network device through the second terminal, where the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message is used to instruct the first terminal to complete the RRC connection reconfiguration.
  • the first terminal and the second terminal complete the unicast connection.
  • method 400 further includes:
  • the second terminal receives a second message of the second network device, where the second message includes configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the second terminal establishes a first bearer according to the configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the first bearer includes: a radio bearer between the second terminal and the first terminal for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal, and a radio bearer between the second terminal and the first terminal for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal.
  • a radio bearer for transmitting signaling and data of the first terminal between two network devices.
  • the second terminal sends a first bearer establishment complete message to the second network device, which is used to indicate that the establishment of the first bearer is completed.
  • the interruption time caused by the establishment of the second terminal bearer can be reduced, and the low delay of communication can be ensured.
  • the second message further includes the first identifier.
  • the second terminal may determine the third identifier according to the first identifier, and for a specific implementation method, reference may be made to the descriptions of implementation manners 2 and 3 in operation 306 in method 300 .
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the timing for the second terminal to determine the third identifier according to the first identifier, that is to say, it needs to be determined before operation 406.
  • the method method 400 further includes:
  • the second network device sends a second RRC connection reconfiguration message to the second terminal, where the second RRC connection reconfiguration message carries a third identifier, and the third identifier is allocated by the second network device, and It is unique with the second terminal.
  • the second network device after the second network device receives the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message forwarded by the second terminal, the second network device sends a second RRC connection reconfiguration message to the second terminal, which is used to instruct the second terminal to establish a connection with the first terminal.
  • the radio bearer for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal between the two terminals and the radio bearer for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal between the second terminal and the second network device.
  • the second network device receives a second RRC connection reconfiguration complete message sent by the second terminal, where the message is used to instruct the second terminal to complete the RRC connection reconfiguration.
  • operation S407 is an optional operation. If the establishment of the bearer has been achieved in S406, operation 407 may be omitted.
  • the first identifier may be the L2 ID of the first terminal.
  • the first terminal reports its own L2 ID to the first network device, and carries it in operations S401 and S402, so that the second terminal can identify the first terminal for switching access, and establishes the first terminal in operation S403.
  • the bearer can reduce the interruption time caused by the establishment of the second terminal bearer, ensure the low delay of communication, and realize the switching process of the first terminal from communication through the direct link to communication through the relay link.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides another communication method. As shown in FIG. 5 , the method may include the following operations:
  • S501 The first network device sends measurement configuration information to the first terminal.
  • the measurement configuration information is used for the first terminal to perform measurement.
  • the first terminal performs a relay discovery process.
  • the first terminal When the first terminal satisfies the triggering condition of the second terminal discovery (Relay Discovery) process, the first terminal implements the relay discovery process, discovers the surrounding second candidate terminals through the discovery process, and obtains the second candidate terminal corresponding to the second candidate terminal.
  • the candidate identifier for example, the C-RNTI of the second candidate terminal
  • the serving cell identifier Cell ID
  • the first terminal sends a sixth message to the first network device, where the sixth message includes at least one second candidate identifier, where the second candidate identifier is used to identify the second candidate terminal, and the second candidate terminal is the first terminal to perform a communication path Candidate target terminal for handover.
  • the sixth message further includes a cell identifier corresponding to at least one second candidate identifier, and relay communication link measurement information between the first terminal and the second candidate terminal.
  • the sixth message may be a measurement report, where the measurement report carries relay communication link measurement information with the second candidate terminal, including the C-RNTI of the second candidate terminal, and the cell where the second candidate terminal is located. identification, and channel quality information with the second candidate terminal.
  • the first network device determines a second identifier from at least one second candidate identifier in the sixth message, where the second identifier is the identifier of the second terminal, and the second terminal is the target terminal for the first terminal to switch the communication path . That is, after receiving the measurement report, the first network device determines a second identifier corresponding to the target second terminal from at least one second candidate identifier based on a certain rule, and the target second terminal is the first terminal to establish a connection with target relay terminal.
  • the first network device identifies the cell identifier of the serving cell of the second terminal contained in the measurement report, and determines whether the serving cell of the second terminal belongs to the current base station or another adjacent base station.
  • the serving cell of the second terminal is another adjacent base station (second network device).
  • the first network device After the first network device determines that the second terminal is the path switching target terminal of the first terminal, the first network device sends a fourth message to the second network device for requesting the first terminal to connect through the relay service of the second terminal into the second network device.
  • the fourth message includes a second identifier corresponding to the second terminal, where the second terminal is a terminal within the coverage of the second network device.
  • the fourth message is a handover request message, and the handover request message carries the C-RNTI of the second terminal.
  • the handover request message may further include the context of the first terminal.
  • the second network device After the second network device receives the fourth message, and after identifying the second terminal and the first terminal, the second network device sends a second message to the second terminal, where the second message includes the configuration information of the first bearer for the first
  • the two terminals establish a first bearer, and the first bearer includes: a radio bearer between the second terminal and the first terminal for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal, and a radio bearer between the second terminal and the second network device A radio bearer that transmits signaling and data of the first terminal.
  • the configuration information of the first bearer may include first radio bearer configuration information, second radio bearer configuration information, at least one of the first radio bearer configuration information and at least one of the second radio bearer configuration information in the first radio bearer configuration information A mapping relationship of the configuration information of the second radio bearer.
  • the first radio bearer configuration information is a radio bearer used for transmitting data and signaling of the first terminal over the communication link between the second terminal and the first terminal.
  • the second radio bearer configuration information is a radio bearer used to transmit data and signaling of the first terminal over the communication link between the second terminal and the base station.
  • the second terminal needs to be triggered to enter the RRC connected (CONNECTED) state through paging.
  • the second network device allocates a third identifier unique to the second terminal to the first terminal to maintain the context of the first terminal, and the second message may carry the third identifier.
  • the third identifier is the local ID of the first terminal.
  • the second terminal receives the second message message sent by the second network device, and configures the corresponding radio bearer according to the second message.
  • the second terminal configures the radio bearer of the communication link with the first terminal according to the third identification of the first terminal and the first radio bearer configuration information, and configures the radio bearer of the communication link with the first terminal according to the third identification of the first terminal and the second radio bearer configuration information
  • the second terminal After the second terminal completes the relevant configuration in the second message, the second terminal sends a second configuration complete message to the second network device.
  • the second message may be an RRC connection reconfiguration message
  • the second terminal after the second terminal completes the RRC connection reconfiguration, the second terminal sends an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the second network device.
  • the second network device receives the second configuration complete message sent by the second terminal.
  • the second terminal allocates the third identifier to the first terminal, and reports the third identifier to the second network device.
  • the second terminal assigns a third identifier to the first terminal according to the second message, and configures a corresponding radio bearer according to the matching information carried in the second message, and the second terminal sends the information to the second network.
  • the second configuration complete message sent by the device carries the third identifier.
  • the second network device receives the second configuration complete message sent by the second terminal, and sends a fifth message to the first network device.
  • the fifth message includes a first RRC connection reconfiguration message, where the first RRC connection reconfiguration message includes a second identifier and first indication information, wherein the first indication information is used to instruct the first terminal to perform communication path switching, and the second identifier It is used to identify the second terminal, and the second terminal is the target terminal of the communication path switching, and the fifth message carries a third identifier, and the third identifier is used to identify the first terminal.
  • the fifth message may be a handover request reply message, and the handover request reply message includes: the local ID of the first terminal, the C-RNTI of the second terminal, and the first indication information.
  • the fifth message may further include fourth bearer configuration information, where the fourth bearer configuration information includes radio bearer configuration information of the link between the first terminal and the second terminal, and/or the first terminal and the second terminal. Radio bearer configuration information for links between network devices.
  • the fourth bearer configuration information is configuration information provided by the second network device to the first terminal through the first network device, and may include the RLC bearer configuration between the first terminal and the second terminal, and the configuration between the first terminal and the second network device.
  • the end-to-end PDCP configuration is configured information provided by the second network device to the first terminal through the first network device, and may include the RLC bearer configuration between the first terminal and the second terminal, and the configuration between the first terminal and the second network device.
  • the first network device receives the fifth message, and sends a first RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first terminal, where the first RRC connection reconfiguration message includes the second identifier and the first indication information, wherein the first indication information is used for
  • the second identifier is used to identify the second terminal
  • the second terminal is the target terminal of the communication path switch
  • the first RRC connection reconfiguration message carries the third identifier
  • the third identifier is used for Identifies the first terminal. That is, the first network device carries the third identifier when sending the first RRC message to the first terminal.
  • the first terminal establishes a unicast connection with the second terminal.
  • the first terminal sends a first message to the second terminal, where the first message includes a third identifier (local ID) of the first terminal.
  • the first message may be a PC5-RRC message, and the message carries the local ID of the first terminal; the second terminal identifies the local ID and combines the previously established first radio bearer and second radio corresponding to the local ID. Bearer, and forward the signaling and data for the first terminal.
  • the first terminal may also send the third identification (local ID) of the first terminal to the second terminal during the process of establishing a unicast connection with the second terminal in S509. Before this, the first terminal also needs to report the local ID of the access layer to the upper layer of the first terminal.
  • local ID third identification
  • the first terminal configures the corresponding radio bearer according to the configuration information in the first RRC connection reconfiguration message. After the RRC connection reconfiguration is completed, a first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message is sent to the second network device through the second terminal.
  • the second terminal can be made to identify the first terminal according to the third identifier reported by the first terminal, determine which RRC connection reconfiguration completion message corresponding to the first terminal is forwarded, and ensure that the second network device correctly completes the new RRC connection reconfiguration message.
  • the second network device and the first network device are the same base station, for the cell identifier of the serving cell of the second terminal included in the first network device identification measurement report in S505, determine the first network device.
  • S505 and S507 in the foregoing embodiment may be omitted. It is easy to understand that other operations such as the functions of the second network device in S506 are implemented by the first network device.
  • what the second network device assigns to the first terminal may not be the unique third identifier under the second terminal, but the first identifier maintained by the base station itself, for example, the first identifier. It is identified as C-RNTI, or 5G-S-TMSI.
  • the embodiment further includes operation S510a before operation S510:
  • the second terminal After the second terminal allocates the third identifier according to the first identifier, the second terminal sends the association relationship between the first identifier and the third identifier to the second network device. That is, the second terminal allocates the third identifier based on the first identifier of the first terminal, and reports the association relationship between the first identifier and the third identifier to the second network device.
  • the second terminal sends the first identification to the second network device, and the second terminal receives third indication information sent by the second network device, where the third indication information includes the association relationship between the first identification and the third identification. That is to say, the second terminal reports the first identifier to the second network device, the second network device allocates the third identifier to the first terminal according to the first identifier, and then feeds back the association relationship between the first identifier and the third identifier to the first terminal. Two terminals. In this way, the third identity is maintained between the second terminal and the second network device.
  • the radio bearer used for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal between the first terminal and the second terminal is configured on the second terminal side in advance, and the communication between the second terminal and the second network device is established.
  • the radio bearer for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal can reduce the large delay in the handover process and even the terminal.
  • the local ID is carried in S506, S507, S508 and S509 by the second network device allocating the local ID of the first terminal, so that the second terminal can identify the first terminal that is switched to access.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides another communication method.
  • the method 600 receives the first bearer forwarded by the second terminal.
  • a related bearer is established after the RRC connection reconfiguration complete message of a terminal, the method 600 may include the following operations:
  • the first network device sends measurement configuration information to the first terminal.
  • S602 The first terminal performs a relay discovery process.
  • S603 The first terminal sends a sixth message to the first network device.
  • S604 The first network device makes a handover decision.
  • the first network device After the first network device determines that the second terminal is the path switching target terminal of the first terminal, the first network device sends a fourth message to the second network device for requesting the first terminal to connect through the relay service of the second terminal into the second network device.
  • the second network device sends a fifth message to the first network device.
  • the fifth message includes a first RRC connection reconfiguration message, where the first RRC connection reconfiguration message includes a second identifier and first indication information, wherein the first indication information is used to instruct the first terminal to perform communication path switching, and the second identifier Used to identify the second terminal, the second terminal is the target terminal of the communication path switching, the first RRC connection reconfiguration message carries a third identifier, and the third identifier is used to identify the first terminal. That is, the first network device carries the third identifier when sending the first RRC message to the first terminal.
  • the fifth message may be a handover request reply message, and the handover request reply message includes: the local ID of the first terminal, the C-RNTI of the second terminal, and the first indication information.
  • the fifth message may further include fourth bearer configuration information, where the fourth bearer configuration information includes radio bearer configuration information of the link between the first terminal and the second terminal, and/or the first terminal and the second terminal. Radio bearer configuration information for links between network devices.
  • the fourth bearer configuration information is configuration information provided by the second network device to the first terminal through the first network device, and may include the RLC bearer configuration between the first terminal and the second terminal, and the configuration between the first terminal and the second network device.
  • the first network device receives the fifth message, and sends a first RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first terminal, where the first RRC connection reconfiguration message includes the second identifier and the first indication information, wherein the first indication information is used for
  • the second identifier is used to identify the second terminal
  • the second terminal is the target terminal of the communication path switch
  • the first RRC connection reconfiguration message carries the third identifier
  • the third identifier is used for Identifies the first terminal. That is, the first network device carries the third identifier when sending the first RRC message to the first terminal.
  • S609 The first terminal establishes a unicast connection with the second terminal.
  • the first terminal sends a first message to the second terminal, where the first message includes a third identifier (local ID) of the first terminal.
  • the timing for the first terminal to send the first message to the second terminal may be after the unicast is established, or may be in the process of the unicast connection.
  • the first terminal configures a corresponding radio bearer according to the configuration information in the first RRC connection reconfiguration message. After the RRC connection reconfiguration is completed, a first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message is sent to the second network device through the second terminal.
  • the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message may be forwarded in the following ways:
  • the second terminal forwards the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message of the first terminal according to the SRB channel preconfigured or preconfigured by the second network device, and carries the third identifier of the first terminal.
  • the second terminal reports the third identifier of the first network device to the second network device, and requests the second network device to establish an SRB channel dedicated to the first terminal, and then the second terminal forwards the first terminal on the SRB channel dedicated to the first terminal.
  • the first RRC connection reconfiguration completion message of a terminal carries the third identifier of the first terminal.
  • the difference between the method 600 and the method 500 is that the method 600 does not establish the first bearer in advance in operation S306, but establishes a radio bearer for the second terminal for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal in operation S612, specifically:
  • the second network device sends a second RRC connection reconfiguration message to the second terminal, where the second RRC connection reconfiguration message includes configuration information of the first bearer for the second terminal to establish a connection between the second terminal and the first terminal A radio bearer that transmits signaling and data of the first terminal, and a radio bearer that transmits signaling and data of the first terminal between the second terminal and the second network device.
  • the second RRC connection reconfiguration message may include first radio bearer configuration information, second radio bearer configuration information, at least one of the first radio bearer configuration information and the second radio bearer configuration information in the first radio bearer configuration information The mapping relationship of at least one second radio bearer configuration information.
  • the first radio bearer configuration information is a radio bearer used for transmitting data and signaling of the first terminal over the communication link between the second terminal and the first terminal.
  • the second radio bearer configuration information is a radio bearer used to transmit data and signaling of the first terminal over the communication link between the second terminal and the base station.
  • the second terminal receives the second RRC connection reconfiguration message sent by the second network device, and configures the corresponding radio bearer according to the second RRC connection reconfiguration message.
  • the second terminal configures the radio bearer of the communication link with the first terminal according to the third identification of the first terminal and the first radio bearer configuration information, and configures the radio bearer of the communication link with the first terminal according to the third identification of the first terminal and the second radio bearer configuration information
  • the second terminal After the second terminal completes the relevant configuration in the second RRC connection reconfiguration message, the second terminal sends a second RRC connection reconfiguration message completion message to the second network device.
  • the second network device receives the second configuration complete message sent by the second terminal.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides another communication method.
  • the difference from the method 500 and the method 600 is that the second network device in the method 700 maintains the first identifier of the first terminal context. (eg, L2 ID) is generated or allocated by the first terminal itself, the method 700 may include the following operations:
  • the first network device sends measurement configuration information to the first terminal.
  • S702 The first terminal performs a relay discovery process.
  • S703 The first terminal sends a sixth message to the first network device.
  • the sixth message includes a first identifier and at least one second candidate identifier, where the first identifier is used to identify the first terminal, the second candidate identifier is used to identify the second candidate terminal, and the second candidate terminal is the first terminal.
  • a candidate target terminal for the terminal to perform communication path switching wherein the first identifier is the L2 ID of the first terminal, and the second candidate identifier is the C-RNTI of the candidate target terminal. It can be understood that the first terminal reports the identifier of the candidate target terminal found in S702 to the first network device, and initiates a path switching request.
  • the first network device receives the sixth message.
  • S704 The first network device makes a handover decision.
  • the first network device After the first network device determines that the second terminal is the target terminal of the path switching of the first terminal, the first network device sends a fourth message to the second network device for requesting the first terminal to use the relay service of the second terminal Access the second network device.
  • the fourth message includes the first identifier of the first terminal and the second identifier of the second terminal, the second terminal is determined after the switching decision of the first network device, and the second terminal is the target terminal for the first terminal to perform path switching .
  • the second network device sends a fifth message to the first network device.
  • the fifth message includes a first RRC connection reconfiguration message, where the first RRC connection reconfiguration message includes a second identifier and first indication information, wherein the first indication information is used to instruct the first terminal to perform communication path switching, and the second identifier It is used to identify the second terminal, and the second terminal is the target terminal of the communication path switching.
  • the fifth message may be a handover request reply message, where the handover request reply message includes: the C-RNTI of the second terminal and the first indication information.
  • the first RRC connection reconfiguration message may further include fourth bearer configuration information, where the fourth bearer configuration information includes radio bearer configuration information of the link between the first terminal and the second terminal, and/or the first Radio bearer configuration information of the link between the terminal and the second network device.
  • the fourth bearer configuration information is configuration information provided by the second network device to the first terminal through the first network device, and may include the RLC bearer configuration between the first terminal and the second terminal, and the configuration between the first terminal and the second network device.
  • the end-to-end PDCP configuration is configuration information provided by the second network device to the first terminal through the first network device, and may include the RLC bearer configuration between the first terminal and the second terminal, and the configuration between the first terminal and the second network device.
  • the first network device determines that the second network device accessed by the second terminal is itself, that is, the first network device and the second network device are the same network device, operations S705 and S706 may be omitted.
  • the first network device autonomously decides whether to allow the first terminal to perform handover and configure the relevant bearer accordingly.
  • the first network device receives the fifth message, and sends a first RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first terminal, where the first RRC connection reconfiguration message includes the second identifier and the first indication information, wherein the first indication information is used for for instructing the first terminal to switch the communication path, the second identifier is used to identify the second terminal, and the second terminal is the target terminal of the communication path switching.
  • the first terminal establishes a unicast connection with the second terminal.
  • the first terminal configures the corresponding radio bearer according to the configuration information in the first RRC connection reconfiguration message. After the RRC connection reconfiguration is completed, the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message is sent to the second network device through the second terminal.
  • the first terminal Before forwarding the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message, the first terminal needs to determine the third identifier of the first terminal, and the third identifier is the local ID of the first terminal. That is, the third identification local ID of the first terminal is determined according to the first identification L2 ID of the first terminal.
  • the second terminal may be determined in the following manner:
  • the second terminal After the second terminal allocates the third identifier according to the first identifier, the second terminal sends the association relationship between the first identifier and the third identifier to the second network device. That is, the second terminal allocates the third identifier based on the first identifier of the first terminal, and reports the association relationship between the first identifier and the third identifier to the second network device.
  • the second terminal sends the first identification to the second network device, and the second terminal receives third indication information sent by the second network device, where the third indication information includes the association relationship between the first identification and the third identification. That is to say, the second terminal reports the first identifier to the second network device, the second network device allocates the third identifier to the first terminal according to the first identifier, and then feeds back the association relationship between the first identifier and the third identifier to the first terminal. Two terminals. In this way, the third identity is maintained between the second terminal and the second network device.
  • a bearer related to forwarding the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message is established for the second terminal in advance, and the method 700 may further include operation S706:
  • the second network device After the second network device receives the fourth message and identifies the second terminal and the first terminal, the second network device sends a second message to the second terminal, where the second message includes the configuration information of the first bearer for the second terminal Establish a first bearer, where the first bearer includes: a radio bearer between the second terminal and the first terminal for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal, and a transmission first bearer between the second terminal and the second network device. A radio bearer of signaling and data for a terminal.
  • the first bearer can be established in advance, the large communication delay or even the communication interruption caused by the establishment of the second terminal bearer can be reduced, and the low communication delay can be ensured.
  • the second message carries the first identifier of the first terminal, where the first identifier is the L2 ID of the first terminal.
  • method 700 may further include optional operation S712, in this embodiment of the present application, the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message may be forwarded in the following manners :
  • the second terminal forwards the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message of the first terminal according to the SRB channel preconfigured or preconfigured by the second network device or the preset default SRB channel, and carries the third identifier of the first terminal.
  • the second terminal reports the third identifier of the first network device to the second network device, and requests the second network device to establish an SRB channel dedicated to the first terminal, and then the second terminal forwards the first terminal on the SRB channel dedicated to the first terminal.
  • the first RRC connection reconfiguration completion message of a terminal carries the third identifier of the first terminal.
  • the second terminal forwards the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message of the first terminal according to the first bearer, and carries the third identifier of the first terminal.
  • the first bearer may be established through the second message in the process S705.
  • Optional operation S712 the second network device sends a second RRC connection reconfiguration message to the second terminal, where the second RRC connection reconfiguration message includes configuration information of the first bearer for the second terminal to establish the connection between the second terminal and the first terminal.
  • the second RRC connection reconfiguration message may include first radio bearer configuration information, second radio bearer configuration information, at least one of the first radio bearer configuration information and the second radio bearer configuration information in the first radio bearer configuration information The mapping relationship of at least one second radio bearer configuration information.
  • the first radio bearer configuration information is a radio bearer used for transmitting data and signaling of the first terminal over the communication link between the second terminal and the first terminal.
  • the second radio bearer configuration information is a radio bearer used to transmit data and signaling of the first terminal over the communication link between the second terminal and the base station.
  • the second terminal receives the second RRC connection reconfiguration message sent by the second network device, and configures the corresponding radio bearer according to the second RRC connection reconfiguration message.
  • the second terminal configures the radio bearer of the communication link with the first terminal according to the third identification of the first terminal and the first radio bearer configuration information, and configures the radio bearer of the communication link with the first terminal according to the third identification of the first terminal and the second radio bearer configuration information
  • the second terminal After the second terminal completes the relevant configuration in the second RRC connection reconfiguration message, the second terminal sends a second RRC connection reconfiguration message completion message to the second network device.
  • the second network device receives the second configuration complete message sent by the second terminal.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides another communication method.
  • the method 800 maintains the context of the first terminal by using the rrc-transcationidentifier carried in the RRC reconfiguration message by the second network device.
  • the method 800 Can include the following actions:
  • the first network device sends measurement configuration information to the first terminal.
  • S802 The first terminal performs a relay discovery process.
  • S803 The first terminal sends a sixth message to the first network device.
  • S804 The first network device makes a handover decision.
  • the first network device After the first network device determines that the second terminal is the path switching target terminal of the first terminal, the first network device sends a fourth message to the second network device for requesting the first terminal to connect through the relay service of the second terminal into the second network device.
  • the second network device sends a fifth message to the first network device.
  • the fifth message includes a first RRC connection reconfiguration message, where the first RRC connection reconfiguration message includes a first identifier, a second identifier, and first indication information, wherein the first identifier is used to identify the first terminal, and the first identifier is used to identify the first terminal.
  • the indication information is used to instruct the first terminal to switch the communication path, the second identifier is used to identify the second terminal, the second terminal is the target terminal of the communication path switch, the first identifier is the rrc-transcationidentifier of the first terminal, and the second identifier is C-RNTI of the second terminal.
  • the first identifier in this embodiment is rrc-TransactionIdentifier
  • the first identifier is the identifier of the message between the first network device and the first terminal, but it needs to be between the second network device and the second terminal.
  • the second network device allocates the rrc-TransactionIdentifier of the first RRC message, it cannot use the rrc-TransactionIdentifier that has been used between it and the second terminal or other remote terminals relayed by the second terminal.
  • the fifth message may be a handover request reply message, and the handover request reply message includes: the rrc-transcationidentifier of the first terminal, the C-RNTI of the second terminal, and the first indication information.
  • the fifth message may further include fourth bearer configuration information, where the fourth bearer configuration information includes radio bearer configuration information of the link between the first terminal and the second terminal, and/or the first terminal and the second terminal. Radio bearer configuration information for links between network devices.
  • the fourth bearer configuration information is configuration information provided by the second network device to the first terminal through the first network device, and may include the RLC bearer configuration between the first terminal and the second terminal, and the configuration between the first terminal and the second network device.
  • the end-to-end PDCP configuration is configured information provided by the second network device to the first terminal through the first network device, and may include the RLC bearer configuration between the first terminal and the second terminal, and the configuration between the first terminal and the second network device.
  • the first network device receives the fifth message, and sends a first RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first terminal, where the first RRC connection reconfiguration message includes the first identifier, the second identifier, and the first indication information, wherein the The first identifier is used to identify the first terminal, the first indication information is used to instruct the first terminal to switch the communication path, the second identifier is used to identify the second terminal, and the second terminal is the target terminal of the communication path switch. That is, the first network device sends the first RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first terminal by using the rrc-transcationidentifier of the first terminal.
  • the first terminal establishes a unicast connection with the second terminal.
  • the first terminal configures the corresponding radio bearer according to the configuration information in the first RRC connection reconfiguration message. After the RRC connection reconfiguration is completed, a first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message is sent to the second network device through the second terminal.
  • the second terminal When forwarding the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message, the second terminal carries the first identifier of the first terminal, that is, includes the rrc-transcationidentifier of the first terminal.
  • the first terminal Before forwarding the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message, the first terminal needs to determine the third identifier of the first terminal, and the third identifier is the local ID of the first terminal.
  • the second terminal may be determined in the following manner:
  • the second terminal After the second terminal allocates the third identifier according to the L2 ID of the first terminal, the second terminal sends the association relationship between the first identifier and the third identifier to the second network device. That is, the second terminal allocates the third identifier based on the L2 ID of the first terminal, and reports the association relationship between the L2 ID of the first terminal and the third identifier to the second network device.
  • the method 800 can forward the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message in several ways: by presetting a default or pre-configured SRB channel or by requesting the establishment of an SRB channel, the specific implementation method can be Refer to the relevant description in S711 in the method 700 .
  • Operation S812 The second network device sends a second RRC connection reconfiguration message to the second terminal, where the second RRC connection reconfiguration message includes configuration information of the first bearer for the second terminal to establish a relationship between the second terminal and the first terminal.
  • the radio bearer for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal, and the radio bearer for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal between the second terminal and the second network device.
  • the second RRC connection reconfiguration message may include first radio bearer configuration information, second radio bearer configuration information, at least one of the first radio bearer configuration information and the second radio bearer configuration information in the first radio bearer configuration information The mapping relationship of at least one second radio bearer configuration information.
  • the first radio bearer configuration information is a radio bearer used for transmitting data and signaling of the first terminal over the communication link between the second terminal and the first terminal.
  • the second radio bearer configuration information is a radio bearer used to transmit data and signaling of the first terminal over the communication link between the second terminal and the base station.
  • the second terminal receives the second RRC connection reconfiguration message sent by the second network device, and configures the corresponding radio bearer according to the second RRC connection reconfiguration message.
  • the second terminal configures the radio bearer of the communication link with the first terminal according to the third identification of the first terminal and the first radio bearer configuration information, and configures the radio bearer of the communication link with the first terminal according to the third identification of the first terminal and the second radio bearer configuration information
  • the second terminal After the second terminal completes the relevant configuration in the second RRC connection reconfiguration message, the second terminal sends a second RRC connection reconfiguration message completion message to the second network device.
  • the second network device receives the second configuration complete message sent by the second terminal.
  • the method implemented by the terminal may also be implemented by a component (for example, a chip, a processor, a chip system or a circuit) that can be configured in the terminal
  • the method implemented by the network device may also be implemented by a component (eg, a chip, a processor, a system-on-a-chip or a circuit) configurable in the network device.
  • the first network device may also be called a source base station
  • the second network device may also be called a target base station
  • the first terminal may also be called a remote terminal or a remote terminal
  • the second terminal may also be called a relay terminal.
  • the first network device and the second network device are mainly different network devices. It is easy to understand that when the first network device and the second network device are the same network device, that is, In other words, when the first terminal and the second terminal access the same network device, the operations of the second network device in the above embodiments of the present application may be implemented by the first network device, and the first network device and the second network device interact with each other. The operation can be implemented inside the first network device.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device, where the communication device is used to implement the above-mentioned various methods.
  • the communication device may be a terminal device (a first terminal or a second terminal) involved in the above-mentioned various method embodiments, or a device including the above-mentioned terminal device, or a component (for example, a chip, a processor, chip system or circuit); or, the communication device may be a network device (eg, a first network device, a second network device) involved in the foregoing method embodiments, or a device including the foregoing network device, or a device that can be used for A component of a network device; it can be understood that, in order to implement the above-mentioned functions, the communication apparatus includes corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for performing each function.
  • the communication device may be divided into functional modules according to the above method embodiments.
  • each functional module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware, and can also be implemented in the form of software function modules.
  • FIG. 9 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication apparatus 900 according to an embodiment of the present application. It should be understood that the communication apparatus 900 may implement any function corresponding to the first terminal in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the communication device may be a terminal device, or may be a component (eg, a chip or a circuit) that can be configured in the terminal device.
  • the communication device 900 includes: a processing unit 910 and a communication unit 920 .
  • the communication unit in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as a transceiver unit (module), and the processing unit may be referred to as a processing module.
  • the communication unit 920 is configured to send a first message to the second terminal, where the first message includes a first identifier, where the first identifier is used to identify the first terminal.
  • the first message includes a first identifier, where the first identifier is used to identify the first terminal.
  • the communication unit 920 may also send the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the second network device through the second terminal.
  • the communication unit 920 is further configured to receive the first RRC connection reconfiguration message sent by the first network device.
  • the communication unit 920 is further configured to send a sixth message to the first network device, where the sixth message may include at least one second candidate identifier, and the second candidate identifier is used to identify the second candidate terminal, the second candidate terminal.
  • the processing unit 910 is configured to complete the corresponding configuration according to the first RRC connection reconfiguration message.
  • the processing unit 910 may be a processor.
  • the communication unit 920 may be a transceiver, or the communication unit 920 may also be a communication interface.
  • the storage unit 930 may be a memory.
  • the communication apparatus 900 may implement any function corresponding to the second terminal in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the communication device may be a terminal device, or may be a component (eg, a chip or a circuit) that can be configured in the terminal device.
  • the communication apparatus 900 includes: a processing unit 910 and a communication unit 920 , and optionally, a storage unit 930 .
  • the communication unit 920 is configured to receive a first message sent by the first terminal, where the first message includes a first identifier, and the first identifier is used to identify the first terminal.
  • the first message includes a first identifier
  • the first identifier is used to identify the first terminal.
  • the communication unit 920 is further configured to forward the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message sent by the first terminal to the second network device.
  • the processing unit 910 is configured to determine the third identifier.
  • the processing unit 910 is configured to determine the third identifier. For the relevant description of determining the third identifier, reference may be made to the relevant description of the previous embodiment, and details are not repeated here.
  • the communication unit 920 is further configured to receive a second message of the second network device, where the second message includes configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the second message includes configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the processing unit 910 is further configured to establish a first bearer according to the configuration information of the first bearer, where the first bearer includes: a radio bearer between the second terminal and the first terminal for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal , and a radio bearer between the second terminal and the second network device for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal.
  • the communication unit 920 is further configured to receive a second RRC connection reconfiguration message of the second network device, where the second RRC connection reconfiguration message carries a third identifier.
  • the communication apparatus 900 may further include a storage unit 930 .
  • the storage unit 930 may be used to store other information such as computer-executed instructions and/or data.
  • the processing unit 910 may read the instructions or data stored in the storage unit 930 to implement the corresponding solution.
  • the communication apparatus 900 may implement any function corresponding to the first terminal in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the communication device may be a terminal device, or may be a component (eg, a chip or a circuit) that can be configured in the terminal device.
  • the communication apparatus 900 includes: a processing unit 910 and a communication unit 920 , and optionally, a storage unit 930 .
  • the communication unit 920 is configured to send a sixth message to the first network device, where the sixth message includes the first identifier.
  • the sixth message may include a first identifier and at least one second candidate identifier.
  • the second candidate identifier is used for a second candidate terminal, and the second candidate terminal is a candidate target terminal for the first terminal to perform communication path switching.
  • the communication unit 920 is configured to receive a first RRC connection reconfiguration message sent by the first network device, where the first RRC connection reconfiguration message includes a second identifier and first indication information, where the first indication information is used for The first terminal is instructed to perform communication path switching, and the second terminal is the target terminal for the first terminal to perform path switching.
  • the processing unit 910 is configured to establish a corresponding bearer related to the relay link according to the first RRC connection reconfiguration message.
  • the processing unit 910 is configured to establish a radio bearer of the link between the first terminal and the second terminal, and/or the first terminal and the second terminal according to the fourth bearer configuration information in the first RRC connection reconfiguration message.
  • the processing unit 910 is further configured to establish an RLC bearer between the first terminal and the second terminal, and an end-to-end PDCP between the first terminal and the second network device.
  • the communication unit 920 is further configured to send the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the second network device through the second terminal, for indicating The first terminal completes the RRC connection reconfiguration.
  • processing unit 910 is further configured to establish a unicast connection with the second terminal.
  • the communication apparatus 900 may implement any function corresponding to the first terminal in any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 8 .
  • the communication device may be a terminal device, or may be a component (eg, a chip or a circuit) that can be configured in the terminal device.
  • the communication apparatus 900 includes: a processing unit 910 and a communication unit 920 , and optionally, a storage unit 930 .
  • a processing unit 910 and a communication unit 920 and optionally, a storage unit 930 .
  • the communication apparatus 900 may implement any function corresponding to the second terminal in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the communication device may be a terminal device, or may be a component (eg, a chip or a circuit) that can be configured in the terminal device.
  • the communication apparatus 900 includes: a processing unit 910 and a communication unit 920 , and optionally, a storage unit 930 .
  • the communication unit 920 is configured to forward the first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message sent by the first terminal to the second network device.
  • the processing unit 910 is configured to establish a unicast connection with the first terminal.
  • the communication unit 920 is further configured to receive a second message of the second network device, where the second message includes configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the processing unit 910 is further configured to establish a first bearer according to the configuration information of the first bearer, where the first bearer includes: a radio bearer between the second terminal and the first terminal for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal , and a radio bearer between the second terminal and the second network device for transmitting the signaling and data of the first terminal.
  • the communication unit 920 is further configured to send a first bearer establishment complete message to the second network device, so as to indicate that the establishment of the first bearer is completed.
  • processing unit 910 is further configured to determine the third identifier according to the first identifier included in the second message.
  • the communication unit 920 is further configured to receive a second RRC connection reconfiguration message sent by the second network device, where the second RRC connection reconfiguration message carries a third identifier and is used to instruct the second terminal to establish a connection between the second terminal and the first terminal.
  • the communication apparatus 900 may implement any function corresponding to the second terminal in any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 8 .
  • the communication device may be a terminal device, or may be a component (eg, a chip or a circuit) that can be configured in the terminal device.
  • the communication apparatus 900 includes: a processing unit 910 and a communication unit 920 , and optionally, a storage unit 930 .
  • a processing unit 910 and a communication unit 920 and optionally, a storage unit 930 .
  • FIG. 10 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication apparatus 1000 according to an embodiment of the present application. It should be understood that the communication apparatus 1000 may implement any function corresponding to the first network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the communication apparatus may be a network device, or may be a component (eg, a chip or a circuit) that can be configured in the network device.
  • the communication apparatus 1000 includes: a processing unit 1010 and a communication unit 1020 .
  • the communication unit in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as a transceiver unit (module), and the processing unit may be referred to as a processing module.
  • the communication unit 1020 is configured to receive a sixth message sent by the first terminal, where the sixth message may include at least one second candidate identifier, the second candidate identifier is used to identify the second candidate terminal, and the second candidate terminal is the first terminal A candidate target terminal for communication path switching; the sixth message may be a measurement report of the first terminal.
  • the processing unit 1010 is configured to determine a second identifier according to at least one second candidate identifier, where the second identifier is an identifier of a target terminal for the first terminal to switch the communication path.
  • the communication unit 1020 also sends a fourth message to the second network device for requesting to switch the communication path of the first terminal to the second terminal.
  • the fourth message may include the identifier of the second terminal (for example, , C-RNTI) and the context information of the first terminal.
  • the communication unit 1020 further receives a fifth message from the second network device, where the fifth message includes the first RRC connection reconfiguration message, where the first RRC connection reconfiguration message includes the second identifier and the first indication information, wherein , the first indication information is used to instruct the first terminal to switch the communication path, the second identifier is used to identify the second terminal, the second terminal is the target terminal of the communication path switch, and the first RRC connection reconfiguration message carries the first identifier .
  • the communication unit 1020 further sends a first RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first terminal, where the first RRC connection reconfiguration message includes the first identifier, the second identifier and the first indication information, wherein the first indication information uses Instructing the first terminal to switch the communication path, the second terminal is the target terminal of the first terminal to switch the path.
  • the communication apparatus 1000 may implement any function corresponding to the second network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the communication apparatus may be a network device, or may be a component (eg, a chip or a circuit) that can be configured in the network device.
  • the communication apparatus 1000 includes: a processing unit 1010 and a communication unit 1020 .
  • the communication unit 1020 is configured to receive a fourth message sent by the first network device for requesting to switch the communication path of the first terminal to the second terminal.
  • the fourth message may include the identifier of the second terminal. (eg C-RNTI) and context information of the first terminal.
  • the communication unit 1020 further sends a fifth message to the first network device, where the fifth message includes the first RRC connection reconfiguration message, and the first RRC connection reconfiguration message includes the second identifier and the first indication information, wherein , the first indication information is used to instruct the first terminal to switch the communication path, the second identifier is used to identify the second terminal, the second terminal is the target terminal of the communication path switch, and the first RRC connection reconfiguration message carries the first identifier .
  • the communication unit 1020 is further configured to receive a first RRC connection reconfiguration complete message from the first terminal forwarded by the second terminal.
  • the communication unit 1020 is further configured to send a second message to the second terminal, where the second message includes configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the second message includes configuration information of the first bearer.
  • the processing unit 1010 may be a processor.
  • the communication unit 1020 may be a transceiver, or the communication unit 1020 may also be a communication interface.
  • the storage unit 1030 may be a memory.
  • the communication apparatus 1000 may further include a storage unit 1030 .
  • the storage unit 1030 may be used to store other information such as computer-executed instructions and/or data.
  • the processing unit 1010 may read the instructions or data stored in the storage unit 1030 to implement the corresponding solution.
  • the communication apparatus 1000 may implement any function corresponding to the second network device in any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 4 to FIG. 8 .
  • the communication apparatus may be a network device, or may be a component (eg, a chip or a circuit) that can be configured in the network device.
  • the communication apparatus 1000 includes: a processing unit 1010 and a communication unit 1020 .
  • a processing unit 1010 and a communication unit 1020 .
  • the communication apparatus 1000 may implement any function corresponding to the first network device in any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 4 to FIG. 8 .
  • the communication apparatus may be a network device, or may be a component (eg, a chip or a circuit) that can be configured in the network device.
  • the communication apparatus 1000 includes: a processing unit 1010 and a communication unit 1020 .
  • a processing unit 1010 and a communication unit 1020 .
  • the above-mentioned units may also be called modules or circuits, etc., and the above-mentioned units may be provided independently, or may be fully or partially integrated.
  • each unit in the above apparatus can be realized in the form of software calling through the processing element; also can all be realized in the form of hardware; some units can also be realized in the form of software calling through the processing element, and some units can be realized in the form of hardware.
  • each unit can be a separately established processing element, or can be integrated in a certain chip of the device to be implemented, and can also be stored in the memory in the form of a program, which can be called by a certain processing element of the device and execute the unit's processing.
  • each operation of the above method or each of the above units may be implemented by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor element, or may also be implemented in the form of software being invoked by the processing element.
  • a unit in any of the above apparatuses may be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above method, such as: one or more Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), or, one or more Multiple microprocessors (digital singnal processors, DSP), or, one or more field programmable gate arrays (Field Programmable Gate Array, FPGA), or a combination of at least two of these integrated circuit forms.
  • ASICs Application Specific Integrated Circuits
  • DSP digital singnal processors
  • FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
  • FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
  • a unit in the apparatus can be implemented in the form of a processing element scheduler
  • the processing element can be a general-purpose processor, such as a central processing unit (Central Processing Unit, CPU) or other processors that can invoke programs.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • these units can be integrated together and implemented in the form of a system-on-a-chip (SOC).
  • SOC system-on-a-chip
  • the above unit for receiving is an interface circuit of the apparatus for receiving signals from other apparatuses.
  • the receiving unit is an interface circuit used by the chip to receive signals from other chips or devices.
  • the above unit for transmitting is a kind of interface circuit of the apparatus for transmitting signals to other apparatuses.
  • the sending unit is an interface circuit used by the chip to send signals to other chips or devices.
  • the terminal is used to implement the operations of the terminal (eg, the first terminal or the second terminal) in the above embodiments.
  • the terminal includes: an antenna 1110 , a radio frequency device 1120 , and a signal processing part 1130 .
  • the antenna 1110 is connected to the radio frequency device 1120 .
  • the radio frequency apparatus 1120 receives the information sent by the network equipment or other terminals through the antenna 1110, and sends the information sent by the network equipment or other terminals to the signal processing part 1130 for processing.
  • the signal processing part 1130 processes the terminal information and sends it to the radio frequency device 1120
  • the radio frequency device 1120 processes the terminal information and sends it to the network equipment or other terminals through the antenna 1110.
  • the signal processing part 1130 is used to realize the processing of each communication protocol layer of the data.
  • the signal processing part 1130 may be a subsystem of the terminal, and the terminal may also include other subsystems, such as a central processing subsystem, for implementing the processing of the terminal operating system and the application layer; for another example, the peripheral subsystem is used for Realize the connection with other devices.
  • the signal processing part 1130 may be a separately provided chip.
  • the above devices may be located in the signal processing part 1130 .
  • the signal processing section 1130 may include one or more processing elements 1131 , eg, including a main control CPU and other integrated circuits, and an interface circuit 1133 .
  • the signal processing part 1130 may further include a storage element 1132 .
  • the storage element 1132 is used to store data and programs, and the programs used to execute the methods performed by the terminal in the above methods may or may not be stored in the storage element 1132, for example, stored in a memory other than the signal processing part 1130 , the signal processing part 1130 loads the program into the cache for use when used.
  • Interface circuitry 1133 is used to communicate with the device.
  • the above device can be located in the signal processing part 1130, and the signal processing part 1130 can be realized by a chip, and the chip includes at least one processing element and an interface circuit, wherein the processing element is used to perform each operation of any one of the methods performed by the above terminal, and the interface circuit Used to communicate with other devices.
  • the unit for implementing each operation in the above method may be implemented in the form of a processing element scheduler.
  • the apparatus includes a processing element and a storage element, and the processing element calls a program stored in the storage element to execute the above method embodiments. The method executed by the terminal.
  • the storage element may be a storage element in which the processing element is on the same chip, that is, an on-chip storage element.
  • the program for executing the method performed by the terminal in the above method may be in a storage element on a different chip from the processing element, that is, an off-chip storage element.
  • the processing element calls or loads the program from the off-chip storage element to the on-chip storage element, so as to call and execute the method executed by the terminal in the above method embodiments.
  • the unit for the terminal to implement each operation in the above method may be configured as one or more processing elements, and these processing elements are provided on the signal processing part 1130, and the processing elements here may be integrated circuits, for example: One or more ASICs, or, one or more DSPs, or, one or more FPGAs, or a combination of these types of integrated circuits. These integrated circuits can be integrated together to form chips.
  • the units that implement the operations in the above method can be integrated together and implemented in the form of a system-on-a-chip (SOC), and the SOC chip is used to implement the above method.
  • SOC system-on-a-chip
  • At least one processing element and a storage element may be integrated in the chip, and the above terminal execution method may be implemented in the form of a stored program of the storage element being invoked by the processing element; or, at least one integrated circuit may be integrated in the chip to implement the above terminal execution method
  • the functions of some units are realized in the form of calling programs by processing elements, and the functions of some units are realized in the form of integrated circuits.
  • the above apparatus may include at least one processing element and an interface circuit, wherein the at least one processing element is configured to execute any terminal-executed method provided by the above method embodiments.
  • the processing element can execute part or all of the operations performed by the terminal in the first way: by calling the program stored in the storage element; or in the second way: by combining the instructions with the integrated logic circuit of the hardware in the processor element. part or all of the operations performed by the terminal; of course, part or all of the operations performed by the terminal may also be performed in combination with the first manner and the second manner.
  • the processing elements here are the same as those described above, and may be a general-purpose processor, such as a CPU, or one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above method, such as: one or more ASICs, or one or more microprocessors DSP, or, one or more FPGAs, etc., or a combination of at least two of these integrated circuit forms.
  • the storage element may be one memory or a collective term for multiple storage elements.
  • At least one item (single, species) of a, b, or c can represent: a, b, c, ab, ac, bc, or abc, where a, b, c can be single or multiple.
  • “Plurality" means two or more, and other quantifiers are similar.
  • the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned embodiments it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • software it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be downloaded from a website site, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center is by wire (eg, coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that a computer can access, or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, or the like that includes an integration of one or more available media.
  • the usable media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, DVDs), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disks (SSDs)), and the like.
  • a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor, or alternatively, the general-purpose processor may be any conventional processor, controller, microcontroller, or state machine.
  • a processor may also be implemented by a combination of computing devices, such as a digital signal processor and a microprocessor, multiple microprocessors, one or more microprocessors in combination with a digital signal processor core, or any other similar configuration. accomplish.
  • a software unit executed by a processor may be directly embedded in hardware, a software unit executed by a processor, or a combination of the two.
  • Software units can be stored in random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), flash memory, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), EPROM memory, EEPROM memory, registers, hard disk, removable disk, CD-ROM or this.
  • RAM Random Access Memory
  • ROM read-only memory
  • EPROM memory erasable programmable read-only memory
  • EEPROM memory electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
  • registers hard disk, removable disk, CD-ROM or this.
  • a storage medium may be coupled to the processor such that the processor may read information from, and store information in, the storage medium.
  • the storage medium can also be integrated into the processor.
  • the processor and storage medium may be provided in the ASIC.
  • These computer program instructions can also be loaded on a computer or other programmable data processing device to cause a series of operational steps to be performed on the computer or other programmable device to produce a computer-implemented process such that The instructions provide operations for implementing the functions specified in the flow or blocks of the flowcharts and/or the blocks or blocks of the block diagrams.
  • the functions described in this application may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • the functions may be stored on or transmitted over as one or more instructions or code on a computer-readable medium.
  • Computer-readable media includes both computer storage media and communication media including any medium that facilitates transfer of a computer program from one place to another.
  • a storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a general purpose or special purpose computer.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请实施例提供一种通信路径切换的方法、装置及系统。该方法包括：第二终端接收第一终端发送的第一消息，第一消息包括第一终端对应的第一标识。第二终端根据第一标识确定用于标识基于该第二终端的中继通信链路中的第一终端的第三标识，第二终端转发第一终端向第二网络设备发送的第一RRC连接重配完成消息时携带第三标识。通过本申请实施例的方法，第二终端根据第三标识确定转发的是哪个第一终端对应的RRC连接重配完成消息，保证第二网络设备正确完成新接入的第一终端和提前保留的第一终端上下文之间的配对。

Description

一种通信路径切换方法、装置及系统
本申请要求于2020年06月30日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202010622576.7、申请名称为“一种通信路径切换方法、装置及系统”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请实施例涉及通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种通信路径切换方法、装置及系统。
背景技术
移动通信网络中，终端根据不同的通信需求进行通信路径的切换，随着终端的通信需求的多元化，例如中继通信场景的相继出现，对于通信路径切换时的准确性和通信的低时延提出了更高的要求。如何保障通信路径切换时的准确性和通信的低时延是目前需要解决的问题。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供一种通信路径切换方法、装置及系统，用以保障终端通信路径切换时的准确性和通信的低时延。
第一方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法可以由第二终端执行，还可以是第二终端的部件(例如，处理器、芯片或芯片系统等)执行，示例性的，本申请实施例以该方法为第二终端执行为例进行介绍，包括：第二终端接收第一终端发送的第一消息，该第一消息包括第一标识，该第一标识用于标识第一终端；该第二终端设备根据该第一标识确定第三标识，该第三标识用于标识基于第二终端的中继通信链路中的第一终端，该第二终端为该第一终端的通信路径切换的目标终端；第二终端根据该第三标识转发该第一终端向第二网络设备发送的第一无线资源控制RRC连接重配完成消息，该第一RRC连接重配完成消息用于指示第一终端完成RRC连接重配。
可选的，第二终端根据该第三标识转发该第一终端向第二网络设备发送的第一无线资源控制RRC连接重配完成消息，可以理解为，第二终端转发该第一终端向第二网络设备发送的第一无线资源控制RRC连接重配完成消息时，携带该第三标识。可选的，第二终端在接收到第一RRC连接重配完成消息时，添加一个包头，该包头里携带第三标识，将包头和第一RRC连接重配完成消息整体转发给第二网络设备。
通过该方法，可以使得第二终端根据第一终端上报的第一标识识别出第一终端，确定出转发的是哪个第一终端对应的RRC连接重配完成消息，保证第二网络设备正确完成新接入的第一终端与提前保留的第一终端的上下文之间的配对。
一种可能的实现方式中，第二终端接收第一终端发送的第一消息，该第一消息包括第三标识，即第一标识直接为第三标识。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第二终端根据第一消息中的第一标识分配第三标识，第二终端向第二网络设备发送第二指示信息，该第二指示信息包括第一标识和第三标识的关联关系。通过该实现方式，如果第一终端上报的第一标识不是第三标识，第二终端可以根据第一标识为该第一终端分配或生成第三标识，并向第二网络设备通知第一标识和第三标识的关联关系，以便于第二终端和第二网络设备维护该第三标识。需要说明的是，当第一标识为无线资源控制处理标识(radio resource control transaction identifer，rrc-TransactionIdentifier)时，第二终端可以根据第一终端的层2标识(layer 2 identifier，L2 ID)分配第三标识，具体的实现过程是：第二终端向第二网络设备发送第二指示信息，该第二指示信息包括L2 ID和第三标识的关联关系。通过该实现方式，第二终端可以根据L2 ID为该第一终端分配或生成第三标识，并向第二网络设备通知L2 ID和第三标识的关联关系，第二终端会在第一RRC连接重配完成消息中把第一标识和第三标识一起发给第二网络设备,以便于第二终端和第二网络设备维护该第三标识。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一标识；第二终端接收第二网络设备发送的第三指示信息，该第三指示信息包括第一标识与第三标识的关联关系。通过该实现方式，如果第一终端上报的第一标识不是第三标识，可以由第二网络设备分配该第三标识。具体的，通过第二终端向第二网络设备上报该第一标识，第二网络设备根据该第一标识分配第三标识，并向第二终端发送该第三标识，以及第一标识与第三标识的关联关系，以便于第二终端和第二网络设备维护该第三标识。需要说明的是，当第一标识为rrc-TransactionIdentifier时，第二终端可以根据第一终端的L2 ID分配第三标识，具体的实现过程是：第二终端向第二网络设备发送第二指示信息，该第二指示信息包括L2 ID和第三标识的关联关系。通过该实现方式，第二终端可以根据L2 ID为该第一终端分配或生成第三标识，并向第二网络设备通知L2 ID和第三标识的关联关系，第二终端会在第一RRC连接重配完成消息中把第一标识和第三标识一起发给第二网络设备,以便于第二终端和第二网络设备维护该第三标识。
又一种可能的实现方式中，在第二终端接收第一终端发送的第一消息之前，第二终端接收第二网络设备的第二消息，该第二消息包括第一承载的配置信息，第二终端根据第二消息建立第一承载，该第一承载包括：第二终端与第一终端之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和第二终端与第二网络设备之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。通过该实现方式，可以提前建立第一承载，使得第二终端接收到第一终端发送的第一消息后能够直接通过第一承载向第二网络设备发送第一RRC连接重配完成消息，减少因第二终端承载建立所引入的较大的通信时延甚至通信中断，保证通信的低时延。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第二消息还包括第一标识。通过该实现方式，在第二消息中携带第一标识有利于第二终端提前获知第一终端的标识，当第二终端与第一终端建立单播连接并且收到第一终端发送的第一消息后，能够确定这个接入的第一终端就是之前第二网络设备指示切换并保留了上下文的终端，保证第二网络设备正确完成新接入的第一终端与提前保留的第一终端的上下文之间的配对。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第二消息还包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示第二终端为第一终端的通信路径切换的目标终端；第二终端根据第四指示信息分配第三标识，第二终端设备向第二网络设备发送第三标识，所述第一消息中的第一标识为该第三标 识。通过该实现方式，在第二网络设备指示第二终端建立上述第一承载的同时，第二网络设备指示第二终端为第一终端的通信路径切换目标终端，第二终端可以根据该第四指示信息分配该第一终端对应的第三标识，以使得第二终端和第二网络设备获取和维护该第三标识，同样，当第二终端与第一终端建立单播连接并且收到第一终端发送的第一消息后，能够通过第三标识确定这个接入的第一终端就是之前第二网络设备指示切换并保留了上下文的终端，保证第二网络设备正确完成新接入的第一终端与提前保留的第一终端的上下文之间的配对。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第二消息只包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示第二终端为第一终端的通信路径切换的目标终端。第二终端根据第四指示信息分配第三标识，第二终端设备向第二网络设备发送第三标识，所述第一消息中的第一标识为该第三标识。通过该实现方式，第二终端可以根据该第四指示信息分配该第一终端对应的第三标识，以使得第二终端和第二网络设备获取和维护该第三标识，同样，当第二终端与第一终端建立单播连接并且收到第一终端发送的第一消息后，能够通过第三标识确定这个接入的第一终端就是之前第二网络设备指示切换并保留了上下文的终端，保证第二网络设备正确完成新接入的第一终端与提前保留的第一终端的上下文之间的配对。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第二终端通过第一承载转发第一RRC连接重配完成消息时携带第三标识。通过该实现方式，第二终端根据之前依据第二消息建立的第一承载转发第一RRC连接重配完成消息，减少因第二终端承载建立所引入的较大的通信时延甚至通信中断，保证通信的低时延。另外，第二终端转发该第一RRC连接重配完成消息时携带第三标识，有利于第二网络设备识别该RRC连接重配完成消息对应的第一终端，并与提前保留的第一终端的上下文正确配对。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第二终端通过预配置的第二承载转发第一RRC连接重配完成消息，并在转发该第一RRC连接重配完成消息时携带第三标识。通过该实现方式，如果第二终端在转发第一RRC连接重配完成消息之前，还没有为该第一终端建立专用的承载，第二终端可以通过预配置的第二承载转发该消息，可以减少因第二终端承载建立所引入的较大的通信时延甚至通信中断，保证通信的低时延。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第二终端向第二网络设备发送第三承载建立请求消息，第三承载建立请求消息包含第三标识用于请求建立第三承载；第二终端通过该第三承载发送第一RRC连接重配完成消息。通过该实现方式，如果第二终端在转发第一RRC连接重配完成消息之前，还没有为该第一终端建立专用的承载，第二终端可以通过向第二网络设备请求建立第三承载转发该消息，可以保证第二终端能够正确转发第一RRC连接重配完成消息。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第一标识是第一终端的局部标识(local identifier，local ID)，小区无线网络临时标识(cell radio network temporary identifier,C-RNTI)，5G临时移动用户标识(5G S-temporary mobile subscriber identity,5G-S-TMSI),或无线资源控制处理标识(radio resource control transaction identifer，rrc-TransactionIdentifier)，或层2标识(layer 2 identifier，L2 ID)。通过该实现方式，第一标识可以直接为第三标识，用于第二终端区分中继链路中的第一终端。可选的，如果第一标识不是第三标识，第二终端可以根据该第一标识确定第三标识，达到区分中继链路中的第一终端的目的。
又一种可能的实现方式中，所述第三标识为所述第一终端的local ID。通过该实现方式，第三标识为第一终端的local ID时，第二终端可以通过该第三标识区分基于该第二终端的中继通信链路上的第一终端，确定出转发的是哪个第一终端对应的RRC连接重配完成消息，保证第二网络设备正确完成新接入的第一终端与提前保留的第一终端的上下文之间的配对。
第二方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法可以由第一终端执行，还可以是第二终端的部件(例如，处理器、芯片或芯片系统等)执行，示例性的，本申请实施例以该方法为第一终端执行为例进行介绍，包括：第一终端接收第一网络设备发送的第一RRC连接重配消息，第一RRC连接重配消息包括第一标识、第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，第一标识用于标识第一终端，第一指示信息用于指示第一终端进行通信路径切换，所述第二标识用于标识第二终端，第二终端为该通信路径切换的目标终端；第一终端向所述第二终端发送第一消息，该第一消息包括第一标识。通过该方法，可以使得第二终端根据第一终端上报的第一标识识别出第一终端，有利于后续确定出转发的是哪个第一终端对应的RRC连接重配完成消息，保证第二网络设备正确完成新接入的第一终端与提前保留的第一终端的上下文之间的配对。
一种可能的实现方式中，第一终端通过第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一RRC连接重配完成消息。通过该实现方式，可以通过第二终端向第二网络设备转发第一RRC连接重配完成消息，用于实现基于该第二终端的中继服务接入第二网络设备的过程。
又一种可能的实现方式中，在所述第一终端接收第一网络设备发送的第一RRC连接重配消息之前，所述第一终端向第一网络设备发送第六消息，所述第六消息包括至少一个第二候选标识，所述第二候选标识用于标识第二候选终端，所述第二候选终端为所述第一终端进行通信路径切换的候选目标终端。可选的，第六消息还可以包括与至少一个第二候选标识对应的小区标识，以及所述第一终端与第二候选终端之间的中继通信链路测量信息，通过该实现方式，第一终端可以向第一网络设备上报至少一个候选的目标切换终端的标识和对应的小区标识及链路测量信息，有助于该第一网络设备进行路径切换的决策。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第一标识为local ID，C-RNTI，5G-S-TMSI,或rrc-TransactionIdentifier。通过该实现方式，第一标识可以直接为第三标识，用于第二终端区分中继链路中的第一终端。可选的，如果第一标识不是第三标识，第二终端可以根据该第一标识确定第三标识，达到区分中继链路中的第一终端的目的。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第一网络设备和第二网络设备为同一或不同的网络设备。通过该实现方式，第一终端和第二终端接入的可以是同一个网络设备也可以是不同的网络设备。
第三方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法可以由第一网络设备执行，还可以是第一网络设备的部件(例如，处理器、芯片或芯片系统等)执行，示例性的，本申请实施例以该方法为第一网络设备执行为例进行介绍，包括：第一网络设备接收第二网络设备发送的第五消息，第五消息包括第一RRC连接重配消息，该第一RRC连接重配消息包括第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，第一指示信息用于指示第一终端进行通信路径切换，第二标识用于标识第二终端，第二终端为所述通信路径切换的目标终端；该第一RRC连接重配消息携带第一标识、，第一标识用于标识第一终端。第一网络设备向第一终端发送该第一RRC连接重配消息。通过该实现方式，第一网络设备接收到第二网络设备的切换指示后， 向第一终端设备发送第一RRC连接重配消息用于指示第一终端进行路径切换。通过携带第一标识，第一终端可以获得用于标识自身的第一标识，进一步的，有利于后续第二终端和第二网络设备维护该第一标识。
一种可能的实现方式中，第一网络设备接收所述第一终端发送的第六消息，所述第六消息包括至少一个第二候选标识，所述第一终端与第二候选终端之间的中继通信链路测量信息，所述第二候选标识用于标识所述第二候选终端，所述第二候选终端为所述第一终端进行通信路径切换的候选目标终端；可选的，第六消息中可以包括与至少一个第二候选标识对应的小区标识。
所述第一网络设备在所述至少一个第二候选标识中确定所述第二标识。
通过该实现方式，第一终端可以向第一网络设备上报目标切换终端的标识和对应的链路测量信息，有助于该第一网络设备进行路径切换的决策。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第一标识为local ID，C-RNTI，5G-S-TMSI,或rrc-TransactionIdentifier。通过该实现方式，第一网络设备向第一终端发送第一RRC连接重配消息携带第一标识，用于第一终端确定用于区分自身的标识，其中，该第一标识可以直接为第三标识，用于方便后续第二终端区分中继链路中的第一终端。可选的，如果第一标识不是第三标识，后续第二终端可以根据该第一标识确定第三标识，达到区分中继链路中的第一终端的目的。
第四方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法可以由第二网络设备执行，还可以是二网络设备的部件(例如，处理器、芯片或芯片系统等)执行，示例性的，本申请实施例以该方法为第二网络设备执行为例进行介绍，包括：第二网络设备接收第一网络设备发送的第四消息，该第四消息包括第二标识，该第二标识用于标识第二终端，该第二终端为第二网络设备覆盖范围内的终端，该第四消息用于请求第一终端通过所述第二终端的中继服务接入所述第二网络设备；第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送第五消息，该第五消息包括第一RRC连接重配消息，该第一RRC连接重配消息包括第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，第一指示信息用于指示第一终端进行通信路径切换，第二标识用于标识第二终端，该第二终端为所述通信路径切换的目标终端。通过该实现方式，第二网络设备接收到第一网络设备的路径切换请求之后，向第一网络设备发送请求回复消息，该回复消息中包括切换指示以及第一终端的第一标识和切换目标终端的第二标识，以使得进一步完成第一终端基于第二终端的通信服务接入到第二网络设备下的过程。
一种可能的实现方式中，在第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送第五消息之前，第二网络设备向第二终端发送第二消息，第二消息包括第一承载的配置信息；第一承载的配置信息用于第二终端建立第一承载，第一承载包括：第二终端与第一终端之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和第二终端与第二网络设备之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。通过该实现方式，第二终端可以在转发的第一终端的第一RRC连接重配完成消息之前建立中继通信链路相关的承载，即可以提前建立第一承载，使得第二终端接收到第一终端发送的第一消息后能够直接通过第一承载向第二网络设备发送第一RRC连接重配完成消息，减少因第二终端承载建立所引入的较大的通信时延甚至通信中断，保证通信的低时延。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第二消息中还包括第一标识。通过该实现方式，在第二消息中携带第一标识有利于第二终端提前获知第一终端的标识，当第二终端与第一终端建立 单播连接并且收到第一终端发送的第一消息后，能够确定这个接入的第一终端就是之前第二网络设备指示切换并保留了上下文的终端，保证第二网络设备正确完成新接入的第一终端与提前保留的第一终端的上下文之间的配对。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第二消息还包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示第二终端为第一终端的通信路径切换的目标终端；第二网络设备接收第二终端设备发送的第三标识，该第三标识为第二终端根据第四指示信息分配的，所述第五消息中的第一标识为该第三标识。通过该实现方式，在第二网络设备指示第二终端建立上述第一承载的同时，第二网络设备指示第二终端为第一终端的通信路径切换目标终端，第二终端可以根据该第四指示信息分配该第一终端对应的第三标识，以使得第二终端和第二网络设备获取和维护该第三标识,同样，当第二终端与第一终端建立单播连接并且收到第一终端发送的第一消息后，能够通过第三标识确定这个接入的第一终端就是之前第二网络设备指示切换并保留了上下文的终端，保证第二网络设备正确完成新接入的第一终端与提前保留的第一终端的上下文之间的配对。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第二消息只包括第四指示信息，也就是，该实现方式中不建立上述第一承载。该第四指示信息用于指示第二终端为第一终端的通信路径切换的目标终端。第二网络设备接收第二终端设备发送的第三标识，该第三标识为第二终端根据第四指示信息分配的，所述第五消息中的第一标识为该第三标识。通过该实现方式，第二终端可以根据该第四指示信息分配该第一终端对应的第三标识，以使得第二终端和第二网络设备获取和维护该第三标识,同样，当第二终端与第一终端建立单播连接并且收到第一终端发送的第一消息后，能够通过第三标识确定这个接入的第一终端就是之前第二网络设备指示切换并保留了上下文的终端，保证第二网络设备正确完成新接入的第一终端与提前保留的第一终端的上下文之间的配对。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第二网络设备接收第二终端转发的第一终端的第一RRC连接重配完成消息，并在转发该第一RRC连接重配完成消息时携带第三标识，该第三标识用于标识基于所述第二终端的中继通信链路中的所述第一终端，并且与第一标识存在关联关系。
可选的，第一标识直接为该第三标识，例如，第一标识直接为第一终端的local ID。
可选的，第一标识与第三标识有对应关系或关联关系，也就是说，根据第一标识可以确定出第三标识。例如，第一标识为第一终端对应的C-RNTI，5G-S-TMSI,或rrc-TransactionIdentifier。第三标识为第一终端的local ID。
通过该实现方式，第二网络设备可以根据第三标识区分接收的是哪个第一终端对应的RRC连接重配完成消息，以使得，第二网络能够识别第三标识找到之前通过第一标识维护的第一终端的上下文。
又一种可能的实现方式中，示例性的，第三标识与第一标识存在关联关系包括：第二网络设备接收第二终端发送的第一标识，第二网络设备根据该第一标识为第一终端分配第三标识，并向第二终端发送该该第三标识与第一标识之间的关联关系。
又一种示例的情况下，第三标识与第一标识存在关联关系包括：第二终端根据第一标识分配第三标识，并向第二网络设备发送第一标识与第三标识之间的关联关系。
通过该实现方式，第二网络设备在接收该第一RRC连接重配完成消息之前，可以确定 第一标识与第三标识的关联关系，有利于第二终端与第二网络设备之间维护第三标识，使得第一网络设备能够识别第三标识找到之前通过第一标识维护的第一终端的上下文。
又一种示例的情况下，当第一标识为第一终端对应的rrc-TransactionIdentifier时，第三标识与第一标识存在关联关系包括：第二网络设备接收第二终端发送的第一终端的L2 ID，第二网络设备根据该L2 ID为第一终端分配第三标识，并向第二终端发送该该第三标识与该L2 ID之间的关联关系；或者，第二终端根据第一终端的L2 ID分配第三标识，并向第二网络设备发送该L2 ID与第三标识之间的关联关系。
通过该实现方式，第二网络设备在接收该第一RRC连接重配完成消息时，能够同时识别第一标识以及第三标识，有利于第二终端与第二网络设备之间维护第三标识，使得第一网络设备能够识别第三标识找到之前通过第一标识维护的第一终端的上下文。
又一种示例的情况下，第二网络设备接收第二终端转发的第一终端的第一RRC连接重配完成消息，并接收第二终端转发时携带的第三标识，第三标识与所述第一标识存在关联关系；第二网络设备向第二终端发送第二RRC连接重配消息，该第二RRC连接重配消息携带第三标识。通过该实现方式，第二网络设备在接收该第一RRC连接重配完成消息之后，通过向第二终端发送第二RRC连接重配消息指示第二终端进行RRC连接重配。例如，建立中继通信链路相关的承载。也就是说，第二终端也可以在转发的第一终端的第一RRC连接重配完成消息之后建立中继通信链路相关的承载。
第五方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法可以由第一网络设备执行，还可以是三网络设备的部件(例如，处理器、芯片或芯片系统等)执行，示例性的，本申请实施例以该方法为第一网络设备执行为例进行介绍，包括：第一网络设备接收第一终端发送的第六消息，所述第六消息包括至少一个第二候选标识，所述第二候选标识用于标识第二候选终端，所述第二候选终端为所述第一终端进行通信路径切换的候选目标终端，可选的，第六消息中还可以包括与至少一个第二候选标识对应的小区标识，所述第一终端与第二候选终端之间的中继通信链路测量信息。第一网络设备向第一终端设备发送第一RRC连接重配消息，所述第一RRC连接重配消息包括所述第一标识、第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一终端进行通信路径切换，该第二标识用于标识第二终端，所述第二终端为所述第一终端进行路径切换的目标终端，所述第一标识用于标识所述第一终端。通过该方法，第一网络设备向第一终端分配第一标识，第一终端获得能够标识自身的第一标识，有利于后续第二终端通过该标识达到识别第一终端的目的。
一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一网络设备在所述至少一个第二候选标识中确定所述第二标识。通过该实现方式，第一网络设备从第一终端上报的至少一个候选第二终端中确定出一个第一终端进行路径切换的目标终端。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第一网络设备接收第二终端转发的来自第一终端的第一RRC连接重配完成消息。第一网络设备根据该第一RRC连接重配完成消息确定第一终端完成RRC连接重配。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第一网络设备接收第一RRC连接重配完成消息之前，所述第一网络设备接收所述第二终端设备发送的所述第一标识与第三标识的关联关系，所述第三标识用于标识基于所述第二终端的中继链路中的所述第一终端；或者，
所述第一网络设备接收所述第二终端发送的所述第一标识；
所述第一网络设备根据所述第一标识分配所述第三标识，所述第一网络设备向所述第一终端发送所述第一标识与所述第三标识的关联关系。
通过该实现方式，第二终端在转发第一RRC连接重配完成消息前，确定第三标识，有利于第二终端与第一网络设备之间维护该第三标识，使得第一网络设备能够识别第三标识找到之前通过第一标识维护的第一终端的上下文。
又一种可能的实现方式中，当第一标识为第一终端对应的rrc-TransactionIdentifier时，第一网络设备确定第三标识与第一标识的关联关系方法包括：第一网络设备接收第二终端发送的第一终端的L2 ID，第一网络设备根据该L2 ID为第一终端分配第三标识，并向第二终端发送该该第三标识与该L2 ID之间的关联关系；或者，第二终端根据第一终端的L2 ID分配第三标识，并向第一网络设备发送该L2 ID与第三标识之间的关联关系。
通过该实现方式，第一网络设备在接收该第一RRC连接重配完成消息时，能够同时识别第一标识以及第三标识，有利于第二终端与第一网络设备之间维护第三标识，使得第一网络设备能够识别第三标识找到之前通过第一标识维护的第一终端的上下文。
又一种可能的实现方式中，在所述第一网络设备向所述第一终端发送所述第一RRC连接重配消息之前，所述第一网络设备向第二终端发送第二消息，所述第二消息包括第一承载的配置信息，所述第一承载的配置信息用于所述第二终端建立所述第一承载，所述第一承载包括：所述第二终端与所述第一终端之间的传输所述第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和所述第二终端与所述第一网络设备之间的传输所述第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。
通过该实现方式，可以提前建立第一承载，使得第二终端接收到第一终端发送的第一消息后能够直接通过第一承载向第一网络设备发送第一RRC连接重配完成消息，减少因第二终端承载建立所引入的较大的通信时延甚至通信中断，保证通信的低时延。
又一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二消息还包括所述第一标识。通过该实现方式，以使得第二终端提前获知第一终端的标识，当第二终端与第一终端建立单播连接并且收到第一终端发送的第一消息后，能够确定这个接入的第一终端就是之前第一网络设备指示切换并保留了上下文的终端，保证第一网络设备正确完成新接入的第一终端与提前保留的第一终端的上下文之间的配对。
又一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二消息还包括第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第二终端为所述第一终端的通信路径切换的目标终端；
所述第一网络设备接收所述第二终端发送的所述第三标识。通过该实现方式，可以提前建立第一承载，减少因第二终端承载建立所引入的较大的通信时延甚至通信中断，保证通信的低时延，并且以使得第二终端确定自身为第一终端的通信路径切换的目标终端，使得第二终端与第一网络设备之间维护第三标识，同样，当第二终端与第一终端建立单播连接并且收到第一终端发送的第一消息后，能够通过第三标识确定这个接入的第一终端就是之前第一网络设备指示切换并保留了上下文的终端，保证第一网络设备正确完成新接入的第一终端与提前保留的第一终端的上下文之间的配对。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第二消息只包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示第二终端为第一终端的通信路径切换的目标终端。第二终端根据第四指示信息分配第三标识，第二终端设备向第一网络设备发送第三标识，所述第一消息中的第一标识为该第三标 识。通过该实现方式，第二终端可以根据该第四指示信息分配该第一终端对应的第三标识，以使得第二终端和第一网络设备获取和维护该第三标识，同样，当第二终端与第一终端建立单播连接并且收到第一终端发送的第一消息后，能够通过第三标识确定这个接入的第一终端就是之前第一网络设备指示切换并保留了上下文的终端，保证第一网络设备正确完成新接入的第一终端与提前保留的第一终端的上下文之间的配对。
又一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一网络设备向所述第二终端发送第二RRC连接重配消息，所述第二RRC连接重配消息携带所述第三标识。通过该实现方式，以使得第二终端建立中继链路相关的承载。
又一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一标识为local ID，C-RNTI，5G-S-TMSI,或rrc-TransactionIdentifier，所述第二标识为C-RNTI，所述第三标识为local ID。
第六方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法可以由第一终端执行，还可以是第二终端的部件(例如，处理器、芯片或芯片系统等)执行，示例性的，本申请实施例以该方法为第一终端执行为例进行介绍，包括：第一终端向第一网络设备发送第六消息，所述第六消息包括第一标识，至少一个第二候选标识，所述第一标识用于标识所述第一终端，所述第二候选标识用于标识第二候选终端，所述第二候选终端为所述第一终端进行通信路径切换的候选目标终端，可选的，第六消息中还可以包括与至少一个第二候选标识对应的小区标识，所述第一终端与第二候选终端之间的中继通信链路测量信息。第一终端接收第一网络设备发送的第一RRC连接重配消息，该第一RRC连接重配消息包括第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，第一指示信息用于指示第一终端进行通信路径切换，第二标识用于标识第二终端，第二终端为第一终端进行通信路径切换的目标终端；第一终端通过第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一RRC连接重配完成消息。通过该方法，可以使得第二终端根据第一终端上报的第一标识识别出第一终端，确定出转发的是哪个第一终端对应的RRC连接重配完成消息，保证第二网络设备正确完成新接入的第一终端与提前保留的第一终端的上下文之间的配对。
一种可能的实现方式中，第一标识为第一终端的L2 ID。通过该实现方式，第一网络设备确定第一标识，并上报给第一网络设备，用于保证第二终端识别转发的是哪个第一终端对应的RRC连接重配完成消息。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第一网络设备和第二网络设备为同一或不同的网络设备，即在通信路径切换前，第一终端对应的第一网络设备和第二终端对应的第二网络设备可以是同一个网络设备也可以是不同的网络设备。
第七方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法可以由第一网络设备执行，还可以是第一网络设备的部件(例如，处理器、芯片或芯片系统等)执行，示例性的，本申请实施例以该方法为第一网络设备执行为例进行介绍，包括：第一网络设备接收第一终端发送的第六消息，所述第六消息包括第一标识，至少一个第二候选标识，所述第一标识用于标识所述第一终端，所述第二候选标识用于标识第二候选终端，所述第二候选终端为所述第一终端进行通信路径切换的候选目标终端，可选的，第六消息中还可以包括与至少一个第二候选标识对应的小区标识，所述第一终端与第二候选终端之间的中继通信链路测量信息。所述第一网络设备向所述第二网络设备发送第四消息，所述第四消息包括所述第一标识和第二标识，所述第二标识用于标识第二终端，所述第二终端为所述第一终端进行通信 路径切换的目标终端。
通过该方法，第一网络设备向第二网络设备上报切换请求并携带第一标识，有利于实现第一终端基于第二终端的中继服务接入到第二网络设备下。
一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一网络设备在所述至少一个第二候选标识中确定所述第二标识。通过该实现方式，第一网络设备从第一终端上报的至少一个候选第二终端中确定出一个第一终端进行路径切换的目标终端。
一种可能的实现方式中，第一标识为第一终端的L2 ID。通过该实现方式，第一终端确定第一标识，并上报给第一网络设备，用于保证第二终端识别转发的是哪个第一终端对应的RRC连接重配完成消息。
第八方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法可以由第二网络设备执行，还可以是二网络设备的部件(例如，处理器、芯片或芯片系统等)执行，示例性的，本申请实施例以该方法为第二网络设备执行为例进行介绍，包括：第二网络设备接收第一网络设备发送的第四消息，该第四消息包括第一标识和第二标识，该第一标识用于标识第一终端，第二标识用于标识第二终端，第二终端为第一终端进行通信路径切换的目标终端；第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送第五消息，该第五消息包括第一RRC连接重配消息，该第一RRC连接重配消息包括第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，第一指示信息用于指示第一终端进行通信路径切换，第二标识用于标识第二终端，该第二终端为通信路径切换的目标终端。通过该方法，第二网络设备接收第一网络设备上报的第一终端的第一标识以及路径切换的目标终端的第二标识，确定指示第一终端进行路径切换。该第一标识有利于第二网络设备维护该第一终端的上下文，以使得，第一终端通过第二终端接入第二网络设备时，第二网络设备能够通过该第一标识识别并匹配提前维护的上下文。以使得进一步完成第一终端基于第二终端的通信服务接入到第二网络设备下的过程。
一种可能的实现方式中，在第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送第五消息之后第二网络设备接收所述第二终端转发的所述第一终端的第一RRC连接重配完成消息。通过该实现方式，第二网络设备根据第一RRC连接重配完成消息确定第一终端完成RRC连接重配。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第二网络设备接收第二终端转发的第一终端的第一RRC连接重配完成消息，并接收第二终端转发时携带的第三标识，该第三标识用于标识基于所述第二终端的中继通信链路中的所述第一终端，并且与第一标识存在关联关系。
可选的，第一标识与第三标识有对应关系或关联关系，也就是说，根据第一标识可以确定出第三标识。例如，第一标识为第一终端对应的L2 ID。第三标识为第一终端的local ID。
通过该实现方式，第二网络设备可以根据第三标识区分接收的是哪个第一终端对应的RRC连接重配完成消息。
又一种可能的实现方式中，第二网络设备在接收该第一RRC连接重配完成消息之前确定该第三标识与第一标识存在关联关系，示例性的，第三标识与第一标识存在关联关系包括：第二网络设备接收第二终端发送的第一标识，第二网络设备根据该第一标识为第一终端分配第三标识，并向第二终端发送该第三标识与第一标识之间的关联关系。
又一种示例的情况下，第二网络设备在接收该第一RRC连接重配完成消息之前确定该第三标识与第一标识存在关联关系，第三标识与第一标识存在关联关系包括：第二终端根 据第一标识分配第三标识，并向第二网络设备发送第一标识与第三标识之间的关联关系。
通过该实现方式，第二网络设备在接收该第一RRC连接重配完成消息之前，可以确定第一标识与第三标识的关联关系，有利于第二终端与第二网络设备之间维护第三标识。
一种可能的实现方式中，在第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送第五消息之前，第二网络设备向第二终端发送第二消息，第二消息包括第一承载的配置信息和第一标识；第一承载的配置信息用于第二终端建立第一承载，第一承载包括：第二终端与第一终端之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和第二终端与第二网络设备之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。通过该实现方式，第二终端可以在转发的第一终端的第一RRC连接重配完成消息之前建立中继通信链路相关的承载，即可以提前建立第一承载，减少因第二终端承载建立所引入的较大的通信时延甚至通信中断，保证通信的低时延。另外，第二消息中还包括第一标识。通过该实现方式，在第二消息中携带第一标识有利于第二终端确定将要接入的是哪一个第一终端。
一种可能的实现方式中，第二网络设备接收第二终端转发的第一终端的第一RRC连接重配完成消息之后，并接收第二终端转发时携带的第三标识，第二网络设备向第二终端发送第二RRC连接重配消息，该第二RRC连接重配消息携带第三标识。通过该实现方式，第二网络设备在接收该第一RRC连接重配完成消息之后，通过向第二终端发送第二RRC连接重配消息指示第二终端进行RRC连接重配。例如，建立中继通信链路相关的承载。也就是说，第二终端也可以在转发的第一终端的第一RRC连接重配完成消息之后建立中继通信链路相关的承载。
一种可能的实现方式中，第一标识为第一终端的L2 ID，第三标识为第一终端的local ID。
第九方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该方法可以由第一网络设备执行，还可以是第一网络设备的部件(例如，处理器、芯片或芯片系统等)执行，示例性的，本申请实施例以该方法为第一网络设备执行为例进行介绍，包括：第一网络设备接收第一终端发送的第六消息，所述第六消息包括第一标识，至少一个第二候选标识，所述第二候选标识用于标识第二候选终端，所述第二候选终端为所述第一终端进行通信路径切换的候选目标终端第二标识，所述第一标识用于标识所述第一终端，可选的，第六消息中还可以包括与至少一个第二候选标识对应的小区标识，所述第一终端与第二候选终端之间的中继通信链路测量信息。
所述第一网络设备向所述第一终端发送第一RRC连接重配消息，所述第一RRC连接重配消息包括第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一终端进行通信路径切换，所述第二标识用于标识第二终端，所述第二终端为所述第一终端进行通信路径切换的目标终端。
通过该方法，第一网络设备接收第一终端上报的第一标识，并指示第一终端设备基于第二终端的中继服务切换到第一网络设备下。
一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一网络设备比较直接链路信道参考信号接收功率(reference signal received power,RSRP)，侧行链路RSRP，预设RSRP阈值之间的大小关系确定所述第二标识。通过该实现方式，第一网络设备从第一终端上报的至少一个候选第二终端中确定出一个第一终端进行路径切换的目标终端。
一种可能的实现方式中，第一网络设备接收第二终端转发的来自第一终端的第一RRC连接重配完成消息。第一网络设备根据该第一RRC连接重配完成消息确定第一终端完成RRC连接重配。
一种可能的实现方式中，第一网络设备接收第一RRC连接重配完成消息之前，
所述第一网络设备接收所述第二终端设备发送的所述第一标识与第三标识的关联关系，所述第三标识用于标识基于所述第二终端的中继链路中的所述第一终端；或者，
所述第一网络设备接收所述第二终端发送的所述第一标识；
所述第一网络设备根据所述第一标识分配所述第三标识，所述第一网络设备向所述第一终端发送所述第一标识与所述第三标识的关联关系。
通过该实现方式，第二终端在转发第一RRC连接重配完成消息前，确定第三标识，有利于第二终端与第一网络设备之间维护该第三标识，使得第一网络设备能够识别第三标识找到之前通过第一标识维护的第一终端的上下文。
一种可能的实现方式中，在所述第一网络设备向所述第一终端发送所述第一RRC连接重配消息之前，所述第一网络设备向第二终端发送第二消息，所述第二消息包括第一承载的配置信息和所述第一标识，所述第一承载的配置信息用于所述第二终端建立所述第一承载，所述第一承载包括：所述第二终端与所述第一终端之间的传输所述第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和所述第二终端与所述第一网络设备之间的传输所述第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。
通过该实现方式，基于第一承载的配置信息可以提前建立第一承载，减少因第二终端承载建立所引入的较大的通信时延甚至通信中断，保证通信的低时延；基于第二消息中的第一标识，使得第二终端提前获知第一终端的标识，当第二终端与第一终端建立单播连接并且收到第一终端发送的第一消息后，能够确定这个接入的第一终端就是之前第一网络设备指示切换并保留了上下文的终端，保证第一网络设备正确完成新接入的第一终端与提前保留的第一终端的上下文之间的配对。
一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一网络设备向所述第二终端发送第二RRC连接重配消息，所述第二RRC连接重配消息携带所述第三标识。通过该实现方式，以使得第二终端建立中继链路相关的承载。
一种可能的实现方式中，所述第一标识为L2 ID,所述第二标识为C-RNTI，所述第三标识为local ID。通过该实现方式，第一终端确定第一标识，并上报给第一网络设备，用于保证第二终端识别转发的是哪个第一终端对应的RRC连接重配完成消息。
第十方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该装置可以是第一终端，还可以是第一终端的部件(处理器，芯片或芯片系统)。该装置具有实现上述第二方面、或第六方面、或第二方面的各可能的实现方法、或第六方面的各可能的实现方法的功能。该功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。
第十一方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该装置可以是第二终端，还可以是用于第二终端的的部件(处理器，芯片或芯片系统)。该装置具有实现上述第一方面、或第一方面的各可能的实现方法的功能。该功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。
第十二方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该装置可以是第一网络设备，还可以是用于第一网络设备的的部件(处理器，芯片或芯片系统)。该装置具有实现上述第三方面、第五方面、或第七方面或第九方面或上述方面对应的各可能的实现方法的功能。该功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。
第十三方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该装置可以是第二网络设备，还可以是用于第二网络设备的的部件(处理器，芯片或芯片系统)。该装置具有实现上述第四方面、第八方面或上述方面对应的各可能的实现方法的功能。该功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。
第十四方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，包括处理器和存储器；该存储器用于存储计算机执行指令，当该装置运行时，该处理器执行该存储器存储的该计算机执行指令，以使该装置执行如上述第一方面、第二方面或第六方面的方法，第一方面、第二方面或第六方面的各可能的实现方法中的任意方法。
第十五方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，包括处理器和存储器；该存储器用于存储计算机执行指令，当该装置运行时，该处理器执行该存储器存储的该计算机执行指令，以使该装置执行如上述第三至五方面或第七至第九方面的方法，第三至五方面或第七至第九方面的各可能的实现方法中的任意方法。
第十六方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，包括用于执行上述第一方面至第三方面的方法，第一方面至第九方面的各可能的实现方法中的任意方法的各个操作的单元或手段(means)。
第十七方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，包括处理器和接口电路，所述处理器用于通过接口电路与其它装置通信，并执行上述第一方面、第二方面或第六方面的方法，第一方面、第二方面或第六方面的各可能的实现方法中的任意方法。该处理器包括一个或多个。
第十八方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，包括处理器和接口电路，所述处理器用于通过接口电路与其它装置通信，并执行上述第三至五方面或第七至第九方面的方法，第三至五方面或第七至第九方面的各可能的实现方法中的任意方法。该处理器包括一个或多个。
第十九方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，包括处理器，用于与存储器相连，用于调用所述存储器中存储的程序，以执行上述第一方面、第二方面或第六方面的方法，第一方面、第二方面或第六方面的各可能的实现方法中的任意方法。该存储器可以位于该装置之内，也可以位于该装置之外。且该处理器包括一个或多个。
第二十方面，本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得处理器执行上述第三至五方面或第七至第九方面的方法，第三至五方面或第七至第九方面的各可能的实现方法中的任意方法。
第二十一方面，本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，该计算机产品包括计算机程序，当计算机程序运行时，使得上述第一方面、第二方面或第六方面的方法，第一方面、第二方面或第六方面的各可能的实现方法中的任意方法被执行。
第二十二方面，本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，该计算机产品包括计算机 程序，当计算机程序运行时，使得上述第三至五方面或第七至第九方面的方法，第三至五方面或第七至第九方面的各可能的实现方法中的任意方法被执行。
第二十三方面，本申请实施例还提供一种芯片系统，包括：处理器，用于执行上述第一方面、第二方面或第六方面的方法，第一方面、第二方面或第六方面的各可能的实现方法中的任意方法。
第二十四方面，本申请实施例还提供一种芯片系统，包括：处理器，用于执行上述第三至五方面或第七至第九方面的方法，第三至五方面或第七至第九方面的各可能的实现方法中的任意方法。
第二十五方面，本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统，包括：上述第十方面，第十一方面和第十二方面所述的通信装置。
第二十六方面，本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统，包括：上述第十方面，第十一方面，第十二方面和第十三方面所述的通信装置。
附图说明
图1A为本申请实施例所适用的一种网络架构示意图；
图1B为本申请实施例所适用的一种网络架构示意图；
图2为直接通信到非直接通信切换的流程示意图；
图3为本申请实施例提供一种通信方法示意图；
图4为本申请实施例提供又一种通信方法示意图；
图5为本申请实施例提供又一种通信方法示意图；
图6为本申请实施例提供又一种通信方法示意图；
图7为本申请实施例提供又一种通信方法示意图；
图8为本申请实施例提供又一种通信方法示意图；
图9为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置示意图；
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置示意图；
图11为本申请实施例提供的一种终端示意图。
具体实施方式
如图1A所示，为本申请实施例所适用的一种通信系统100示意图，包括至少两个终端111和112和以及至少一个网络设备101。可选的，终端111可以通过无线接口(如Uu口)与网络设备101通信。终端111和终端112之间可以进行直连通信，比如通过终端之间的PC5接口通信。终端之间的链路可以称为侧行链路，或者边链路，或者旁链路，或者PC5接口链路，或者终端间链路。一种可能的方式中，终端111从与网络设备101的直接通信切换到通过终端112与网络设备101进行通信。又一种可能的方式中，如图1B所示，该通信系统100中还包括网络设备102，终端112与网络设备102进行通信，网络设备101和网络设备102可以进行交互。终端111从与网络设备101的直接通信切换到通过终端112与网络设备102进行通信。
终端(terminal)，是一种具有无线收发功能的设备，可以部署在陆地上，包括室内或 室外、手持或车载；也可以部署在水面上(如轮船等)；还可以部署在空中(例如飞机、气球和卫星上等)。所述终端可以是用户设备(user equipment)、手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)终端、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)终端、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、用户设备(user equipment，UE)等。本申请实施例中的终端与终端之间支持直连通信，终端与终端之间的直连通信也可以称为侧链路(side link)通信或设备到设备(device to device)通信。
网络设备，是一种为终端提供无线通信功能的设备，网络设备包括但不限于：第五代(5th generation，5G)中的下一代基站(g nodeB，gNB)、演进型节点B(evolved node B，eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller，RNC)、节点B(node B，NB)、基站控制器(base station controller，BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station，BTS)、家庭基站(例如，home evolved nodeB，或home node B，HNB)、基带单元(baseBand unit，BBU)、传输点(transmitting and receiving point，TRP)、发射点(transmitting point，TP)、移动交换中心等。
5G独立部署时，网络设备的逻辑体系可以采用集中单元(centralized unit，CU)和分布单元(distributed unit，DU)分离模式。基于协议栈功能的配置，CU-DU逻辑体系可以分为两种，即CU-DU分离架构和CU-DU融合架构。针对CU-DU分离架构，协议栈的功能可以动态配置和分割，其中一些功能在CU中实现，剩余功能在DU中实现。为满足不同分割选项的需求，需要支持理想传输网络和非理想传输网络。CU与DU之间的接口应当遵循第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project，3GPP)规范要求。针对CU-DU融合架构，CU和DU的逻辑功能整合在同一个网络设备中，以实现协议栈的全部功能。
为了便于理解，对本申请实施例中出现的术语进行简要介绍：
1、源基站:与核心网存在连接的网络设备，该网络设备当前为远端终端提供通信服务，也就是源基站为远端终端所驻留的基站。可选的，本申请实施例中，源基站也可以称为第一网络设备。
2、目标基站：与核心网存在连接的网络设备。该网络设备当前为中继终端提供通信服务，也就是目标基站为中继终端所驻留的基站。可选的，本申请实施例中，目标基站也可以称为第二网络设备。
3、中继终端(relay UE)：具有中继服务功能的终端。其他终端可以通过中继终端与网络设备通信。可选的，本申请实施例中，中继终端也可以称为第二终端。
4、远端终端(remote UE)：接受中继服务的终端。远端终端通过中继终端与网络设备进行通信，并且，远端终端与中继终端存在侧行链路连接。可选的，本申请实施例中，远端终端也可以称为远程终端或第一终端。
5、直接通信：终端直接与网络设备进行通信。
6、基于中继终端的通信：远端终端通过中继终端与网络设备进行通信。
7、通信路径切换：终端的通信环境发生改变时，终端切换通信路径，以实现通过新的通信路径进行通信。通信路径切换也可以称为通信链路切换。
在移动通信系统中，终端根据不同的通信需求进行通信路径的切换。传统的通信路径切换流程中，连接态终端的移动性管理是由网络设备控制的，即网络设备通过发送切换消息用于指示终端切换到哪个小区以及如何进行切换。随着终端的通信需求的多元化，例如由于中继通信场景的出现，通信路径切换过程也引入了更多的场景，其中包括图1A和图1B所示的远端终端(remote UE)从直接通信切换到基于中继终端(relay UE)通信的场景,因此需要针对终端复杂的通信需求设计通信路径切换流程，用于保证通信路径切换时的准确性和通信的低时延。
如图2所示，为层2中继(L2relay)架构下直接通信到非直接通信(direct to indirect)切换的流程示意图。包括以下操作：
S201：源基站向remote UE发送测量配置信息。
该测量配置信息用于remote UE进行测量。
S202：remote UE实行中继发现过程。当remote UE满足relay UE发现(Relay Discovery)过程触发条件后，remote UE实行中继发现过程，通过该发现过程来发现周围的relay UE，并获得relay UE的小区无线网络临时标识(cell radio network temporary identifier,C-RNTI)及该relay UE对应的服务小区标识(Cell ID)，同时测量获得与该relay UE之间的信道质量信息。
S203：remote UE向源基站发送测量报告，该测量报告中携带与relay UE的中继通信链路测量信息，其中包括relay UE的C-RNTI，relay UE所在的小区标识，以及与relay UE的信道质量信息。
S204：源基站根据测量报告确定把该remote UE的通信链路切换成通过目标relay UE的中继通信链路。
源基站接收到该测量报告后，基于一定的规则确定出目标relay UE，该目标relay UE为remote UE将要与之建立连接的目标中继终端。
S205a：源基站识别测量报告中的relay UE的服务小区标识，并向目标基站发送切换请求消息，消息中携带relay UE的C-RNTI。
S205b：目标基站识别relay UE，并向源基站发送切换请求回复消息，消息中携带remote UE的通信路径切换的指示信息，remote UE与relay UE之间通信的无线承载配置信息，以及remote UE和目标基站通信的PDCP层的配置信息。
S205c：源基站向remote UE发送RRC连接重配消息，消息中携带切换请求回复消息中的信息。
S206：remote UE与relay UE建立单播连接，并按照RRC连接重配消息中的内容完成无线承载建立。
S207：remote UE通过relay UE的转发，回复RRC连接重配完成消息。
S208：目标基站接收到remote UE回复的RRC连接重配完成消息后，向relay UE发送RRC连接重配消息，建立relay UE和remote UE之间的传输remote UE的信令及数据的无线承载，以及建立用于在relay UE和目标基站之间的传输remote UE的数据和信令的无线 承载。
通过上述过程，实现了remote UE从直接通信切换到基于中继终端(relay UE)通信，满足了remote UE的通信需求。
针对上述remote UE的通信路径的切换流程，至少存在以下两个问题：
问题1)：多个remote UE同时接入同一relay UE时，relay UE不能识别出具体的remote UE。具体的，参考图2，在S207中，relay UE在转发的过程中不能识别该RRC连接重配完成消息对应的是哪个remote UE，导致目标基站也不能完成新接入的remote UE和提前保留的remote UE上下文之间的配对。
由于多个remote UE同时接入同一relay UE时，relay UE不能识别出具体的remote UE，则relay UE如何确定转发的是哪个remote UE对应的RRC连接重配完成消息，以及保证目标基站正确完成新接入的remote UE和提前保留的remote UE上下文之间的配对的问题，亟需解决。
问题2)、relay UE承载建立会引入较大的中断时间，产生较大通信时延。参考图2，S208中，目标基站接收到remote UE的RRC连接重配完成消息后为relay UE建立数据承载，会引入较大的中断时间。如何减少relay UE承载建立的中断时间，保证通信的低时延是有待解决的问题。
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，如图3所示，该方法300包括以下操作：
S306，第一终端向第二终端发送第一消息，第一消息包括第一标识，该第一标识用于标识第一终端。
相应的，第二终端接收第一终端发送的第一消息。
其中，第一消息可以为PC5-RRC消息。
可选的，该第一消息用于指示第一终端进行基于第二终端的通信路径切换。
一种可能的方式中，该第一消息是第一终端与第二终端之间完成单播连接后发送的，也就是第一终端与第二终端之间建立侧行链路之后发送的。
另一种可能的方式中，该第一消息可以是第一终端与第二终端建立单播连接的过程中发送的。也就是说，第一终端在单播连接建立过程中，通过第一消息把第一标识上报给第二终端。容易理解的，在此之前，第一终端还需要将接入层(access stratum)的第一标识上报给上层。
第一标识可以是第一终端的局部标识(local identifier，local ID)，小区无线网络临时标识(cell radio network temporary identifier,C-RNTI)，5G临时移动用户标识(5G S-temporary mobile subscriber identity,5G-S-TMSI),或无线资源控制处理标识(radio resource control transaction identifer，rrc-TransactionIdentifier),或层2标识(layer 2 identifier，L2 ID)。
容易理解的，当本实施例中的第一标识为rrc-TransactionIdentifier时，该第一标识为第一网络设备与第一终端之间的消息的标识，但是需要在第二网络设备与第二终端之间也具有唯一性，也就是说第二网络设备在分配第一RRC连接重配消息的rrc-TransactionIdentifier时，不能使用其与第二终端或者通过第二终端中继的其他远端终端之间已经使用的rrc-TransactionIdentifier。
S308，第二终端根据第三标识转发第一终端向第二网络设备发送的第一无线资源控制 (radio resource control，RRC)连接重配完成消息。
第二终端根据第三标识转发所述第一终端向第二网络设备发送的第一无线资源控制RRC连接重配完成消息可以理解为，第二终端转发第一终端向第二网络设备发送的第一RRC连接重配完成消息时携带第三标识。
即第一终端通过第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一RRC连接重配完成消息，该第一RRC连接重配完成消息用于指示该第一终端完成RRC连接重配，并在第二终端转发该第一RRC连接重配完成消息时携带第三标识。也就是说，第二终端在转发第一终端向第二网络设备发送的第一RRC连接重配完成消息时携带第三标识。该第三标识用于标识基于第二终端的中继通信链路中的第一终端，也就是说，第三标识为中继通信链路中用于标识第一终端的唯一标识。
为了解决第二终端在转发的过程中不能识别该第一RRC连接重配完成消息对应的是哪个第一终端，导致第二网络设备也不能完成新接入的第一终端和提前保留的第一终端上下文之间的配对的问题，需要第二终端在转发第一RRC连接重配完成消息前确定第三标识，即在操作S308之前，该方法300还可以包括：
S307，第二终端确定第三标识。
即第二终端可以根据操作S306中的第一标识确定第三标识。该第三标识用于标识基于该第二终端设备的中继链路中的第一终端，例如，该第三标识为第一终端的local ID。通过该第三标识，第二终端能够区分转发的是哪个第一终端对应的第一RRC连接重配完成消息。容易理解的，本申请实施例不限定第二终端只能在操作S307中确定第三标识，第二终端可以在接收到第一终端的第一标识时，就可进行第三标识的确定。
作为示例，下面给出上述操作中S307中确定第三标识的几种不同实现方法。
实现方式一：第一标识为第三标识。
即第一消息中包含的第一标识直接为该第三标识，也就是说，第二终端在第一消息中直接获得了第三标识。
可选的，也可以是收到第二网络设备发送的第一终端的第一标识后，确定该第一标识直接为第三标识。
实现方式二：第二终端根据第一标识分配第三标识。
第二终端根据第一标识分配第三标识，该第一标识可以为C-RNTI或5G-S-TMSI。
可以理解为，第二终端根据第一终端的C-RNTI或5G-S-TMSI为第一终端分配第一终端对应的local ID，用于在基于第二终端的中继链路上区分第一终端。
在分配该第三标识之后，第二终端向第二网络设备发送第二指示信息，该第二指示信息包括第一标识和第三标识的关联关系。通过该第二指示信息，第二终端设备可以明确第一标识和第三标识的关联关系。本申请实施例中，分配标识也可以理解为生成标识。
实现方式三：第二终端接收第二网络设备分配的第三标识。
第二终端接收第一消息后，向第二网络设备上报该第一标识，第二网络设备根据该第一标识分配第三标识，并把第一标识与第三标识的关联关系发送给第二终端。
也就是说，该第三标识是通过第二终端上报第一标识之后，第二网络设备根据第一标识分配的。
实现方式四：第二终端和第二网络设备根据第一终端的L2 ID分配第三标识。
当第一标识为rrc-TransactionIdentifier时，第二终端不能解析识别该第一标识，可以通过第一终端的L2 ID与第二网络设备维护第三标识。具体的包括：第二终端根据该L2 ID分配第三标识，并向第二网络设备发送第二指示信息，该第二指示信息包括该L2 ID和第三标识的关联关系，通过该第二指示信息，第二终端设备可以明确第一终端的L2 ID和第三标识的关联关系；或者，第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一终端的L2 ID，第二网络设备根据该L2 ID分配第三标识，并把该L2 ID与第三标识的关联关系发送给第二终端。
为了解决上述技术问题2，可选的方法300还包括：
S303，第二终端接收第二网络设备的第二消息，该第二消息可以是RRC连接重配消息，包括第一承载的配置信息。
第二终端根据该第一承载的配置信息建立第一承载，第一承载包括：第二终端与第一终端之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和第二终端与第二网络设备之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。
可选的，第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一承载建立完成消息，用于指示完成第一承载的建立。
通过在操作S303建立第一承载，可以减少因第二终端承载建立产生的中断时间，保证通信的低时延。
可选的，第二消息中还包括第一标识。
容易理解的，第二终端可以根据该第一标识确定第三标识，具体实现的方法可以参照操作306中的描述。本申请实施例中并不限定第二终端根据第一标识确定第三标识的时机，也就是说，第二终端可以在S306中确定，也可以在S303中确定，需在操作308之前确定即可。
可选的，第二消息中还包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示第二终端为第一终端的通信路径切换的目标终端。例如，第四指示信息可以指示有新的第一终端将要接入该第二终端。例如，该第四指示信息可以指示有新的remote UE接入，第四指示信息也可以指示不仅指示有新的remote UE接入，还可以携带该remote UE的标识，例如，remote UE对应的C-RNTI或local ID。
一种可能的方式中，第二消息中只包括第四指示信息，第二网络设备通过第四指示信息指示第二终端将有新的第一终端接入，第二终端可以根据该第四指示信息确定第三标识。
可选的，第二终端可以根据该第四指示信息确定第三标识，具体实现的方法可以参照操作306中的描述。所不同的是，将操作306中的第一标识替换为第四指示信息，本申请实施例中并不限定第二终端根据第四指示信息确定第三标识的时机，也就是说，第二终端可以在S306中确定，也可以在S303中确定，需在操作308之前确定即可。
在操作308中，第二终端具有多种实现方式实现转发第一终端向第二网络设备发送的第一RRC连接重配完成消息。
方式一：第二终端通过第一承载转发该第一RRC连接重配完成消息。也就是说，该第一RRC连接重配完成消息承载在操作S303建立的第二终端与第二网络设备之间的第一承载上。
方式二：第二终端通过预配置的或者提前配置的第二承载转发第一RRC连接重配完成消息，并在转发该第一RRC连接重配完成消息时携带所述第三标识。例如，第二终端通过 公用的信令无线承载(signaling radio bearer1，SRB)通道转发第一终端的第一RRC连接重配完成消息。
方式三：第二终端通过第三承载转发第一RRC连接重配完成消息。该方式三包括：
第二终端向第二网络设备发送第三承载建立请求消息，所述第三承载建立请求消息包含第三标识用于请求建立第三承载，第二终端通过第三承载转发第一RRC连接重配完成消息。例如，第二终端上报第一终端的第三标识(local ID)，并请求第二网络设备建立该第一终端专用的SRB通道，然后第二终端在该第一终端专用的SRB通道上转发第一RRC连接重配完成消息。
S309，第二网络设备向第二终端发送第二RRC连接重配消息，所述第二RRC连接重配消息携带第三标识。
即，第二网络设备接收第二终端转发的第一RRC连接重配完成消息后，第二网络设备向第二终端发送第二RRC连接重配消息，用于指示建立第二终端与第一终端之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和第二终端与第二网络设备之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。例如，第二连接重配消息中可以包括第一终端的第三标识(例如，local ID)，以及相关的承载配置信息，第二终端根据该相关的承载配置信息完成建立第二终端与第一终端之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，第二终端与第二网络设备之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载和两个无线承载之间的映射关系。
可选的，第二网络设备接收第二终端发送的第二RRC连接重配完成消息，该消息用于指示第二终端完成RRC连接重配。
容易理解的，操作S309为可选操作，如果S303已经实现承载的建立，则操作303可省略，反之，如果没有执行操作S303则需要执行操作S309实现承载的建立。
方法300中，在第一终端向第二终端发送第一消息之前，该实施例还可以包括：
S301,第一终端向第一网络设备发送第六消息。
相应的，第一网络设备接收该第六消息，该第六消息可以是测量报告消息，其中，第六消息可以包括至少一个第二候选标识，该第二候选标识用于标识第二候选终端，第二候选终端为第一终端进行通信路径切换的候选目标终端；该第六消息可以为第一终端的测量报告，其中可以包括：第二候选终端的C-RNTI及其服务小区标识(Cell ID)和/或第一终端与第二候选终端之间的中继通信链路测量信息。第一网络设备根据该测量报告和一定的准则从至少一个第二候选终端中确定将该第一终端的通信链路切换成通过第二终端的中继通信链路。示例性的，该准则可以是直接通信链路的信道参考信号接收功率(reference signal received power，RSRP)低于某门限值；或者，侧行链路的信道RSRP高于某门限值；或者，侧行链路的信道RSRP大于直接通信链路的信道RSRP，且超过某门限值。直接通信链路为当前第一终端与第一网络设备之间的链路，侧行链路为第一终端与候选终端设备之间的链路。
第一网络设备根据第二终端服务小区标识，确定第二终端的服务小区是本网络设备或者是相邻的第二网络设备。如果为本网络设备，方法300中的操作S302和操作S304可省略，其他操作例如S303中第二网络设备的功能由第一网络设备实现。如果为第二网络设备，执行操作S302和操作S304。
S302，第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第四消息，该第四消息可以是切换请求消息。
即，第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第四消息用于请求将第一终端的通信路径切换到第二终端下，也就是，第一终端请求通过第二终端的中继服务接入第二网络设备，其中，第二终端为第二网络设备覆盖范围内的终端。可选的，第四消息可以包括第二终端的标识(例如，C-RNTI)和第一终端的上下文信息。
S304，第二网络设备接收第四消息，根据该第四消息识别第一终端和第二终端。
第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送第五消息，该第五消息可以是切换请求确认消息，该第五消息包括第一RRC连接重配消息，该第一RRC连接重配消息包括第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，第一指示信息用于指示第一终端进行通信路径切换，第二标识用于标识第二终端，该第二终端为通信路径切换的目标终端，该第一RRC连接重配消息携带第一标识。
其中，第一指示信息用于指示第一终端进行路径切换。
第一标识用于标识第一终端，其中，第一标识可以为local ID，C-RNTI，rrc-TransactionIdentifier或5G-S-TMSI。第二标识用于标识第二终端，其中，第二标识可以为C-RNTI。
容易理解的，当本实施例中的第一标识为rrc-TransactionIdentifier时，该第一标识为第一网络设备与第一终端之间的消息的标识，但是需要在第二网络设备与第二终端之间也具有唯一性，也就是说第二网络设备在分配第一RRC消息的rrc-TransactionIdentifier是，不能使用其与第二终端或者通过第二终端中继的其他远端终端之间已经使用的rrc-TransactionIdentifier。
可选的，第五消息中还可以包括第四承载配置信息，第四承载配置信息包括第一终端和第二终端之间的链路的无线承载配置信息，和/或第一终端和第二网络设备之间的的链路的无线承载配置信息。第四承载配置信息是第二网络设备通过第一网络设备给第一终端的配置信息，可以包括第一终端与第二终端之间的无线链路控制(radio link control，RLC)承载配置，以及第一终端与第二网络设备之间的的端到端的分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)配置。
相应的，第一网络设备接收该第五消息，并根据该第五消息确定指示第一终端进行通信路径切换。
S305，第一网络设备向第一终端发送第一RRC连接重配消息，该第一RRC连接重配消息包括第一标识、第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，第一指示信息用于指示第一终端进行通信路径切换，第二终端为第一终端进行路径切换的目标终端。
其中，第一标识可以为local ID，C-RNTI，rrc-TransactionIdentifier或5G-S-TMSI。第二标识可以为C-RNTI。
可选的，第一RRC连接重配消息还可以包括第四承载配置信息。
相应的，第一终端接收第一网络设备发送的第一RRC连接重配消息，第一终端根据第一RRC连接重配消息确定进行通信路径切换，即第一终端通过第二终端的中继服务接入第二网络设备。
可选的，第一终端根据第一RRC连接重配消息中的第四承载配置信息建立第一终端和第二终端之间的链路的无线承载，和/或第一终端和第二网络设备之间的的链路的无线承载。可选的，第一终端还可以建立第一终端与第二终端之间的RLC承载，以及第一终端与第二网络设备之间的的端到端的PDCP。
可选的，第一终端根据第一RRC连接重配消息完成RRC连接重配之后，第一终端确定通过第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一RRC连接重配完成消息。
与实施例一方法300中，由第二终端分配或者有第二网络设备分配用于标识第一终端的标识不同的是，实施例二方法400中，由第一终端确定标识，最终使得第二终端能够识别各个第一终端，协助第二网络设备完成新接入的第一终端和提前保留的第一终端的上下文的配对。
本申请实施例提供又一种通信方法400，如图4所示，该方法包括以下操作：
S401，第一终端向第一网络设备发送第六消息，该第六消息可以是测量报告消息。
相应的第一网络设备接收该第六消息。该第六消息可以包括第一标识，至少一个第二候选标识，第二候选标识用于第二候选终端，第二候选终端为所述第一终端进行通信路径切换的候选目标终端；可选的，第六消息还可以包括与至少一个第二候选标识对应的小区标识，以及所述第一终端与第二候选终端之间的中继通信链路测量信息。该第六消息可以为第一终端的测量报告。
其中，该第一标识用于标识第一终端，例如，该第一标识为第一终端的层2标识(layer 2 identifier，L2 ID)。可以理解的是，第一标识和测量报告可以是包含在一条消息中发送的，也可以是多条消息分别发送的，本申请实施例并不限定，只要满足第一终端上报第一终端的第一标识即可。
测量报告还可以包括第二候选终端的C-RNTI及其服务小区标识(Cell ID)和第一终端与第二候选终端之间的中继通信链路测量信息。第一网络设备根据该测量报告和一定的准则从至少一个第二候选终端中确定将该第一终端的通信链路切换成通过第二终端的中继通信链路。示例性的，该准则可以是直接通信链路的信道参考信号接收功率(reference signal received power，RSRP)低于某门限值；或者，侧行链路的信道RSRP高于某门限值；侧行链路的信道RSRP大于直接通信链路的信道RSRP，且超过某门限值。直接通信链路为当前第一终端与第一网络设备之间的链路，侧行链路为第一终端与候选终端设备之间的链路。
第一网络设备根据第二终端服务小区标识，确定第二终端的服务小区是本网络设备或者是相邻的第二网络设备。如果为本网络设备，方法400中的操作S402和操作S404可省略，其他操作例如S403中第二网络设备的功能由第一网络设备实现。
S402，第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第四消息，该第四消息可以是切换请求消息。
即，第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第四消息用于请求将第一终端的通信路径切换到能够提供中继服务的第二终端下，也就是，请求第一终端通过第二终端的中继服务接入第二网络设备，其中，第二终端为第二网络设备覆盖范围内的终端。可选的，第四消息可以包括第二终端的第二标识(例如，C-RNTI)、第一终端的上下文信息和第一终端的第一标识。
S404，第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送第五消息，该第五消息可以是切换请求确认消息，该第五消息包括第一RRC连接重配消息，该第一RRC连接重配消息包括第二标识和第一指示信息。
其中，第一指示信息用于指示第一终端进行路径切换。
第二标识用于标识第二终端，其中，第二终端为通信路径切换的目标终端。
可选的，第五消息中还可以包括第四承载配置信息，第四承载配置信息包括第一终端和第二终端之间的链路的无线承载配置信息，和/或第一终端和第二网络设备之间的的链路的无线承载配置信息。第四承载配置信息是第二网络设备通过第一网络设备给第一终端的配置信息，可以包括第一终端与第二终端之间的RLC承载配置，以及第一终端与第二网络设备之间的的端到端的PDCP配置。
相应的，第一网络设备接收该第五消息，并根据该第五消息确定指示第一终端进行通信路径切换。
S405，第一网络设备向第一终端发送第一RRC连接重配消息，该第一RRC连接重配消息包括第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，第一指示信息用于指示第一终端进行通信路径切换，第二终端为第一终端进行路径切换的目标终端。可以理解为，第一网络设备从第二网络设备接收到第一RRC连接重配消息后向第一终端透传该第一RRC连接重配消息。
其中，第二标识可以为第二终端的C-RNTI。
可选的，第一RRC连接重配消息还可以包括第四承载配置信息。
相应的，第一终端接收第一网络设备发送的第一RRC连接重配消息，第一终端根据第一RRC连接重配消息确定进行通信路径切换，即第一终端通过第二终端的中继服务接入第二网络设备。
可选的，第一终端根据第一RRC连接重配消息中的第四承载配置信息建立第一终端和第二终端之间的链路的无线承载，和/或第一终端和第二网络设备之间的的链路的无线承载。可选的，第一终端还可以建立第一终端与第二终端之间的RLC承载，以及第一终端与第二网络设备之间的的端到端的PDCP。
可选的，第一终端根据第一RRC连接重配消息完成RRC连接重配之后，第一终端确定通过第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一RRC连接重配完成消息。
S406，第二终端转发第一终端向第二网络设备发送的第一RRC连接重配完成消息。
即第一终端通过第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一RRC连接重配完成消息，该第一RRC连接重配完成消息用于指示该第一终端完成RRC连接重配。
可选的，在S406之前，第一终端和第二终端完成了单播连接。
可选的，方法400还包括：
可选的操作S403，第二终端接收第二网络设备的第二消息，该第二消息包括第一承载的配置信息。
第二终端根据该第一承载的配置信息建立第一承载，第一承载包括：第二终端与第一终端之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和第二终端与第二网络设备之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。
可选的，第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一承载建立完成消息，用于指示完成第一承载的建立。
通过在操作S403建立第一承载，可以减少因第二终端承载建立产生的中断时间，保证通信的低时延。
可选的，第二消息中还包括第一标识。
容易理解的，第二终端可以根据该第一标识确定第三标识，具体实现的方法可以参照方法300中操作306中实现方式二和实现方式三的描述。本申请实施例中并不限定第二终 端根据第一标识确定第三标识的时机，也就是说，需在操作406之前确定即可。
另一种可能的方式中，方法方法400还包括：
可选的操作S407，第二网络设备向第二终端发送第二RRC连接重配消息，所述第二RRC连接重配消息携带第三标识，该第三标识是第二网络设备分配的，并且与该第二终端之间具有唯一性。
即，第二网络设备接收第二终端转发的第一RRC连接重配完成消息后，第二网络设备向第二终端发送第二RRC连接重配消息，用于指示建立第二终端与第一终端之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和第二终端与第二网络设备之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。
可选的，第二网络设备接收第二终端发送的第二RRC连接重配完成消息，该消息用于指示第二终端完成RRC连接重配。
容易理解的，操作S407为可选操作，如果S406已经实现承载的建立，则操作407可省略。
本申请实施例二方法400中，第一标识可以为第一终端的L2 ID。
通过该方法400，第一终端通过向第一网络设备上报自身的L2 ID，在操作S401和操作S402中携带，使得第二终端能够识别切换接入的第一终端，通过在操作S403建立第一承载，可以减少因第二终端承载建立产生的中断时间，保证通信的低时延，实现了第一终端从通过直接链路通信到通过中继链路通信的切换过程。
为解决上述问题，本申请实施例提供又一种通信方法，如图5所示，该方法可以包括以下操作：
S501：第一网络设备向第一终端发送测量配置信息。
该测量配置信息用于第一终端进行测量。
S502：第一终端实行中继发现过程。当第一终端满足第二终端发现(Relay Discovery)过程触发条件后，第一终端实行中继发现过程，通过该发现过程来发现周围的第二候选终端，并获得第二候选终端对应的第二候选标识(例如，为第二候选终端的C-RNTI)及该第二候选终端对应的服务小区标识(Cell ID)，同时测量获得与该第二候选终端之间的信道质量信息。
S503：第一终端向第一网络设备发送第六消息，该第六消息包括至少一个第二候选标识，第二候选标识用于标识第二候选终端，第二候选终端为第一终端进行通信路径切换的候选目标终端。可选的，第六消息中还包括与至少一个第二候选标识对应的小区标识，以及所述第一终端与第二候选终端之间的中继通信链路测量信息。示例性的，该第六消息可以为测量报告，该测量报告中携带与第二候选终端的中继通信链路测量信息，其中包括第二候选终端的C-RNTI，第二候选终端所在的小区标识，以及与第二候选终端的信道质量信息。
S504：第一网络设备从该第六消息中的至少一个第二候选标识中确定第二标识，第二标识为第二终端的标识，该第二终端为第一终端进行通信路径切换的目标终端。即，第一网络设备接收到该测量报告后，基于一定的规则从至少一个第二候选标识确定出目标第二终端对应的第二标识，该目标第二终端为第一终端将要与之建立连接的目标中继终端。
第一网络设备识别测量报告中包含的第二终端的服务小区的小区标识，确定第二终端 的服务小区是属于本基站还是相邻的其他基站。
本申请实施例以第二终端的服务小区是相邻的其他基站(第二网络设备)为例进行介绍。
S505：第一网络设备确定第二终端为第一终端的路径切换目标终端后，第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第四消息，用于请求第一终端通过第二终端的中继服务接入第二网络设备。
示例性的，第四消息包括第二终端对应的第二标识，该第二终端为第二网络设备覆盖范围内的终端。例如，第四消息为切换请求消息，该切换请求消息中携带第二终端的C-RNTI。可选的，该切换请求消息还可以包括第一终端的上下文。
S506：第二网络设备接收第四消息，识别第二终端和第一终端之后，第二网络设备向所述第二终端发送第二消息，该第二消息包括第一承载的配置信息用于第二终端建立第一承载，该第一承载包括：第二终端与第一终端之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和第二终端与所述第二网络设备之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。通过该实现方式，可以提前建立第一承载，减少因第二终端承载建立所引入的较大的通信时延甚至通信中断，保证通信的低时延。
其中，第一承载的配置信息可以包括第一无线承载配置信息，第二无线承载配置信息，第一无线承载配置信息中的至少一个第一无线承载配置信息与第二无线承载配置信息中的至少一个第二无线承载配置信息的映射关系。
第一无线承载配置信息为用于在第二终端和第一终端之间的通信链路传输第一终端的数据和信令的无线承载。第二无线承载配置信息为用于在第二终端和基站之间的通信链路传输第一终端的数据和信令的无线承载。
容易理解的，若第二终端处于RRC空闲(IDEL)态或RRC非激活(Inactive)态，需要通过寻呼(paging)触发第二终端进入RRC连接(CONNECTED)态。
一种可能的方式中，该第二网络设备为第一终端分配一个第二终端下唯一的第三标识来维护该第一终端的上下文，第二消息中可以携带第三标识。示例性的，第三标识为第一终端的local ID。
相应的，第二终端接收第二网络设备发送的第二消息消息，以及根据该第二消息配置相应的无线承载。
其中，第二终端根据第一终端的第三标识和第一无线承载配置信息配置与第一终端间的通信链路的无线承载，以及根据第一终端的第三标识和第二无线承载配置信息配置用于在第二终端和基站间的通信链路上传输第一终端的数据和信令的无线承载，以及根据第一无线承载和第二无线承载之间的映射关系建立以上两段通信链路承载之间的映射关系。
在第二终端完成第二消息中相关配置后，第二终端向第二网络设备发送第二配置完成消息。示例性的，第二消息可以为RRC连接重配消息时，当第二终端完成RRC连接重配后，第二终端向第二网络设备发送RRC连接重配完成消息。
相应的，第二网络设备接收第二终端发送的第二配置完成消息。
又一种可能的方式中，第二终端为第一终端分配该第三标识，并向第二网络设备上报该第三标识。示例性的，第二终端接收第二消息后，根据该第二消息为第一终端分配第三标识，并按照第二消息中携带的匹配信息配置相应的无线承载，第二终端向第二网络设备 发送的第二配置完成消息携带该第三标识。
S507：第二网络设备接收第二终端发送的第二配置完成消息，以及向第一网络设备发送第五消息。第五消息包括第一RRC连接重配消息，该第一RRC连接重配消息包括第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，第一指示信息用于指示第一终端进行通信路径切换，第二标识用于标识第二终端，第二终端为通信路径切换的目标终端，第五消息中携带第三标识，所述第三标识用于标识第一终端。
示例性的，第五消息可以为切换请求回复消息，该切换请求回复消息中包括：第一终端的local ID，第二终端的C-RNTI和第一指示信息。可选的，第五消息中还可以包括第四承载配置信息，第四承载配置信息包括第一终端和第二终端之间的链路的无线承载配置信息，和/或第一终端和第二网络设备之间的的链路的无线承载配置信息。第四承载配置信息是第二网络设备通过第一网络设备给第一终端的配置信息，可以包括第一终端与第二终端之间的RLC承载配置，以及第一终端与第二网络设备之间的的端到端的PDCP配置。
S508：第一网络设备接收第五消息，以及向第一终端发送第一RRC连接重配消息，该第一RRC连接重配消息包括第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，第一指示信息用于指示第一终端进行通信路径切换，第二标识用于标识第二终端，第二终端为通信路径切换的目标终端，第一RRC连接重配消息携带第三标识，所述第三标识用于标识第一终端。也就是，第一网络设备向第一终端发送第一RRC消息时携带第三标识。
S509：第一终端与第二终端建立单播连接。
S510：第一终端向第二终端发送第一消息，该第一消息包括第一终端的第三标识(local ID)。
示例性的，该第一消息可以为PC5-RRC消息，消息中携带第一终端的local ID；第二终端识别该local ID，结合之前建立的该local ID对应的第一无线承载和第二无线承载，为该第一终端转发之后的信令和数据。
容易理解的，第一终端也可以在S509中与第二终端建立单播连接的过程中，向第二终端发送该第一终端的第三标识(local ID)。在此之前，第一终端还需要把接入层的local ID上报给第一终端的上层。
S511：第一终端根据第一RRC连接重配消息中的配置信息配置相应的无线承载。在完成RRC连接重配之后，通过第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一RRC连接重配完成消息。
通过该方法，可以使得第二终端根据第一终端上报的第三标识识别出第一终端，确定出转发的是哪个第一终端对应的RRC连接重配完成消息，保证第二网络设备正确完成新接入的第一终端与提前保留的第一终端的上下文之间的配对。
在一种可能的实施方式中，存在第二网络设备和第一网络设备为同一基站的情况，对于S505中第一网络设备识别测量报告中包含的第二终端的服务小区的小区标识，确定第二终端的服务小区是属于本基站的情况下，上述实施例中的S505和S507可省略。容易理解的是，其他操作例如S506中第二网络设备的功能由第一网络设备来实现。
可选的，操作S506，S507，S508和S509中，第二网络设备给第一终端分配的可以不是第二终端下唯一的第三标识，而是基站自己维护的第一标识，例如，第一标识为C-RNTI，或5G-S-TMSI。该情况下该实施例还包括在操作S510之前的操作S510a：
方式一：
第二终端根据第一标识分配第三标识后，第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一标识与第三标识的关联关系。也就是说，第二终端基于第一终端的第一标识分配第三标识，并把第一标识与第三标识的关联关系上报给第二网络设备。
方式二：
第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一标识，第二终端接收第二网络设备发送的第三指示信息，该第三指示信息包括第一标识与第三标识的关联关系。也就是说，第二终端向第二网络设备上报第一标识，第二网络设备根据该第一标识为第一终端分配第三标识，再把第一标识和第三标识的关联关系反馈给第二终端。通过该方式以实现第二终端与第二网络设备之间维护第三标识。
通过方法500，通过提前在第二终端侧配置第一终端和第二终端之间的用于传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，以及建立第二终端与第二网络设备之间用于传输第一终端的信令和数据的无线承载，减少切换过程中的较大的时延甚至终端。
另外，通过第二网络设备分配第一终端的local ID的方式，在S506，S507，S508和S509中携带该local ID，使得第二终端能够识别切换接入的第一终端。
为解决上述问题，本申请实施例提供又一种通信方法，如图6所示，与方法500中提前在操作S506中建立第一承载不同的是，方法600在接收到第二终端转发的第一终端的RRC连接重配完成消息之后建立相关承载，该方法600可以包括以下操作：
S601：第一网络设备向第一终端发送测量配置信息。
S602：第一终端实行中继发现过程。
S603：第一终端向第一网络设备发送第六消息。
S604：第一网络设备进行切换决策。
S605：第一网络设备确定第二终端为第一终端的路径切换目标终端后，第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第四消息，用于请求第一终端通过第二终端的中继服务接入第二网络设备。
S607：第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送第五消息。第五消息包括第一RRC连接重配消息，该第一RRC连接重配消息包括第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，第一指示信息用于指示第一终端进行通信路径切换，第二标识用于标识第二终端，第二终端为通信路径切换的目标终端，第一RRC连接重配消息携带第三标识，所述第三标识用于标识第一终端。也就是，第一网络设备向第一终端发送第一RRC消息时携带第三标识。
示例性的，第五消息可以为切换请求回复消息，该切换请求回复消息中包括：第一终端的local ID，第二终端的C-RNTI和第一指示信息。可选的，第五消息中还可以包括第四承载配置信息，第四承载配置信息包括第一终端和第二终端之间的链路的无线承载配置信息，和/或第一终端和第二网络设备之间的的链路的无线承载配置信息。第四承载配置信息是第二网络设备通过第一网络设备给第一终端的配置信息，可以包括第一终端与第二终端之间的RLC承载配置，以及第一终端与第二网络设备之间的的端到端的PDCP配置
S608：第一网络设备接收第五消息，以及向第一终端发送第一RRC连接重配消息，该第一RRC连接重配消息包括第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，第一指示信息用于指示第一终端进行通信路径切换，第二标识用于标识第二终端，第二终端为通信路径切换的目标终端，第一RRC连接重配消息携带第三标识，所述第三标识用于标识第一终端。也就是，第 一网络设备向第一终端发送第一RRC消息时携带第三标识。
S609：第一终端与第二终端建立单播连接。
S610：第一终端向第二终端发送第一消息，该第一消息包括第一终端的第三标识(local ID)。可选的，第一终端向第二终端发送第一消息的时机可以是单播建立之后，也可以是单播连接过程中。
S611：第一终端根据第一RRC连接重配消息中的配置信息配置相应的无线承载。在完成RRC连接重配之后，通过第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一RRC连接重配完成消息。
在第二终端转发第一终端向第二网络设备发送第一RRC连接重配完成消息时，此时，第二终端还没有为该第一终端建立专用的信令无线承载(signaling radio bearer，SRB)，本申请实施例中，可以有以下几种方式转发该第一RRC连接重配完成消息：
转发方式一：
第二终端根据第二网络设备预配置的或提前配置的SRB通道转发第一终端的第一RRC连接重配完成消息，并携带第一终端的第三标识。
转发方式二：
第二终端向第二网络设备上报第一网络设备的第三标识，并请求第二网络设备建立该第一终端专用的SRB通道，然后第二终端在该第一终端专用的SRB通道上转发第一终端的第一RRC连接重配完成消息，并携带第一终端的第三标识。
方法600中操作S601-S605与S607-S611的相关过程可以参考方法500中的S501-S505与S507-S511中的相关描述，本申请实施例不再赘述。
方法600与方法500不同的是，方法600不在操作S306中提前建立第一承载，而是在操作S612中为第二终端建立用于传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，具体为：
S612：第二网络设备向第二终端发送第二RRC连接重配消息，该第二RRC连接重配消息包括第一承载的配置信息用于第二终端建立第二终端与第一终端之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和第二终端与所述第二网络设备之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。
其中，第二RRC连接重配消息可以包括第一无线承载配置信息，第二无线承载配置信息，第一无线承载配置信息中的至少一个第一无线承载配置信息与第二无线承载配置信息中的至少一个第二无线承载配置信息的映射关系。
第一无线承载配置信息为用于在第二终端和第一终端之间的通信链路传输第一终端的数据和信令的无线承载。第二无线承载配置信息为用于在第二终端和基站之间的通信链路传输第一终端的数据和信令的无线承载。
相应的，第二终端接收第二网络设备发送的第二RRC连接重配消息消息，以及根据该第二RRC连接重配消息消息配置相应的无线承载。
其中，第二终端根据第一终端的第三标识和第一无线承载配置信息配置与第一终端间的通信链路的无线承载，以及根据第一终端的第三标识和第二无线承载配置信息配置用于在第二终端和基站间的通信链路上传输第一终端的数据和信令的无线承载，以及根据第一无线承载和第二无线承载之间的映射关系建立以上两段通信链路承载之间的映射关系。
在第二终端完成第二RRC连接重配消息中相关配置后，第二终端向第二网络设备发送第二RRC连接重配消息完成消息。
相应的，第二网络设备接收第二终端发送的第二配置完成消息。
为解决上述问题，本申请实施例提供又一种通信方法，如图7所示，与方法500和方法600中不同的是，方法700中的第二网络设备维护第一终端上下文的第一标识(例如，L2 ID)是第一终端自己生成或分配的，该方法700可以包括以下操作：
S701：第一网络设备向第一终端发送测量配置信息。
S702：第一终端实行中继发现过程。
方法700中操作S701-S702的相关过程可以参考方法500中的S501-S502中的相关描述，本申请实施例不再赘述。
S703：第一终端向第一网络设备发送第六消息。
相应的，第六消息中包括第一标识，至少一个第二候选标识，该第一标识用于标识第一终端，第二候选标识用于标识第二候选终端，该第二候选终端为第一终端进行通信路径切换的候选目标终端，其中，第一标识为第一终端的L2 ID，第二候选标识为候选目标终端的C-RNTI。可以理解为，第一终端将在S702中发现的候选目标终端的标识上报给第一网络设备，发起路径切换请求。
相应的，第一网络设备接收该第六消息。
S704：第一网络设备进行切换决策。
S705：第一网络设备确定第二终端为第一终端的路径切换的目标终端后，第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第四消息，用于请求第一终端通过第二终端的中继服务接入第二网络设备。该第四消息包括第一终端的第一标识和第二终端的第二标识，该第二终端为第一网络设备切换决策之后确定的，该第二终端是第一终端进行路径切换的目标终端。
S707：第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送第五消息。第五消息包括第一RRC连接重配消息，该第一RRC连接重配消息包括第二标识和第一指示信息，其中,第一指示信息用于指示第一终端进行通信路径切换，第二标识用于标识第二终端，第二终端为通信路径切换的目标终端。
示例性的，第五消息可以为切换请求回复消息，该切换请求回复消息中包括：第二终端的C-RNTI和第一指示信息。可选的，第一RRC连接重配消息中还可以包括第四承载配置信息，第四承载配置信息包括第一终端和第二终端之间的链路的无线承载配置信息，和/或第一终端和第二网络设备之间的的链路的无线承载配置信息。第四承载配置信息是第二网络设备通过第一网络设备给第一终端的配置信息，可以包括第一终端与第二终端之间的RLC承载配置，以及第一终端与第二网络设备之间的的端到端的PDCP配置。
容易理解的，如果第一网络设备确定第二终端接入的第二网络设备为自身，也就是说，第一网络设备和第二网络设备为同一个网络设备，那么操作S705，S706可省略。所不同的是，第一网络设备自主决策是否允许第一终端进行切换以及相应的配置该相关承载。
S708：第一网络设备接收第五消息，以及向第一终端发送第一RRC连接重配消息，该第一RRC连接重配消息包括第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，第一指示信息用于指示第一终端进行通信路径切换，第二标识用于标识第二终端，第二终端为通信路径切换的目标终端。
S709：第一终端与第二终端建立单播连接。
S711：第一终端根据第一RRC连接重配消息中的配置信息配置相应的无线承载。在完 成RRC连接重配之后，通过第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一RRC连接重配完成消息。
第一终端在转发第一RRC连接重配完成消息之前，需要确定第一终端的第三标识，第三标识为第一终端的local ID。也就是根据第一终端的第一标识L2 ID确定第一终端的第三标识local ID。
本申请实施例中，第二终端可以通过以下方式确定：
方式一：
第二终端根据第一标识分配第三标识后，第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一标识与第三标识的关联关系。也就是说，第二终端基于第一终端的第一标识分配第三标识，并把第一标识与第三标识的关联关系上报给第二网络设备。
方式二：
第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一标识，第二终端接收第二网络设备发送的第三指示信息，该第三指示信息包括第一标识与第三标识的关联关系。也就是说，第二终端向第二网络设备上报第一标识，第二网络设备根据该第一标识为第一终端分配第三标识，再把第一标识和第三标识的关联关系反馈给第二终端。通过该方式以实现第二终端与第二网络设备之间维护第三标识。
一种可能的方式中，提前为第二终端建立转发该第一RRC连接重配完成消息相关的承载，方法700中还可以包括操作S706：
第二网络设备接收第四消息，识别第二终端和第一终端之后，第二网络设备向所述第二终端发送第二消息，该第二消息包括第一承载的配置信息用于第二终端建立第一承载，该第一承载包括：第二终端与第一终端之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和第二终端与所述第二网络设备之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。通过该实现方式，可以提前建立第一承载，减少因第二终端承载建立所引入的较大的通信时延甚至通信中断，保证通信的低时延。
可选的，第二消息中携带第一终端的第一标识，该第一标识为第一终端的L2 ID。
关于操作S706的相关实现可以参考S506中的相关描述，所不同的是，S706中第二消息携带的是第一终端的L2 ID。
另一种可能的实现方式中，在第二终端转发第一终端向第二网络设备发送第一RRC连接重配完成消息时，此时，第二终端还没有为该第一终端建立专用的信令无线承载(signaling radio bearer，SRB)，在该实现方式下，方法700还可以包括可选的操作S712，本申请实施例中，可以有以下几种方式转发该第一RRC连接重配完成消息：
转发方式一：
第二终端根据第二网络设备预配置的或提前配置的SRB通道或者预设默认的SRB通道转发第一终端的第一RRC连接重配完成消息，并携带第一终端的第三标识。
转发方式二：
第二终端向第二网络设备上报第一网络设备的第三标识，并请求第二网络设备建立该第一终端专用的SRB通道，然后第二终端在该第一终端专用的SRB通道上转发第一终端的第一RRC连接重配完成消息，并携带第一终端的第三标识。
转发方式三：
第二终端根据第一承载转发第一终端的第一RRC连接重配完成消息，并携带第一终端 的第三标识。该第一承载可以是过程S705中通过第二消息建立的。
可选的操作S712：第二网络设备向第二终端发送第二RRC连接重配消息，该第二RRC连接重配消息包括第一承载的配置信息用于第二终端建立第二终端与第一终端之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和第二终端与所述第二网络设备之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。
其中，第二RRC连接重配消息可以包括第一无线承载配置信息，第二无线承载配置信息，第一无线承载配置信息中的至少一个第一无线承载配置信息与第二无线承载配置信息中的至少一个第二无线承载配置信息的映射关系。
第一无线承载配置信息为用于在第二终端和第一终端之间的通信链路传输第一终端的数据和信令的无线承载。第二无线承载配置信息为用于在第二终端和基站之间的通信链路传输第一终端的数据和信令的无线承载。
相应的，第二终端接收第二网络设备发送的第二RRC连接重配消息消息，以及根据该第二RRC连接重配消息消息配置相应的无线承载。
其中，第二终端根据第一终端的第三标识和第一无线承载配置信息配置与第一终端间的通信链路的无线承载，以及根据第一终端的第三标识和第二无线承载配置信息配置用于在第二终端和基站间的通信链路上传输第一终端的数据和信令的无线承载，以及根据第一无线承载和第二无线承载之间的映射关系建立以上两段通信链路承载之间的映射关系。
在第二终端完成第二RRC连接重配消息中相关配置后，第二终端向第二网络设备发送第二RRC连接重配消息完成消息。
相应的，第二网络设备接收第二终端发送的第二配置完成消息。
为解决上述问题，本申请实施例提供又一种通信方法，如图8所示，方法800通过第二网络设备使用RRC重配消息中携带的rrc-transcationidentifier维护第一终端的上下文，该方法800可以包括以下操作：
S801：第一网络设备向第一终端发送测量配置信息。
S802：第一终端实行中继发现过程。
S803：第一终端向第一网络设备发送第六消息。
S804：第一网络设备进行切换决策。
S805：第一网络设备确定第二终端为第一终端的路径切换目标终端后，第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第四消息，用于请求第一终端通过第二终端的中继服务接入第二网络设备。
S807：第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送第五消息。第五消息包括第一RRC连接重配消息，该第一RRC连接重配消息包括第一标识、第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，所述第一标识用于标识第一终端，第一指示信息用于指示第一终端进行通信路径切换，第二标识用于标识第二终端，第二终端为通信路径切换的目标终端，第一标识为第一终端的rrc-transcationidentifier，第二标识为第二终端的C-RNTI。
容易理解的，当本实施例中的第一标识为rrc-TransactionIdentifier时，该第一标识为第一网络设备与第一终端之间的消息的标识，但是需要在第二网络设备与第二终端之间也具有唯一性，也就是说第二网络设备在分配第一RRC消息的rrc-TransactionIdentifier时，不能使用其与第二终端或者通过第二终端中继的其他远端 终端之间已经使用的rrc-TransactionIdentifier。
示例性的，第五消息可以为切换请求回复消息，该切换请求回复消息中包括：第一终端的rrc-transcationidentifier，第二终端的C-RNTI和第一指示信息。可选的，第五消息中还可以包括第四承载配置信息，第四承载配置信息包括第一终端和第二终端之间的链路的无线承载配置信息，和/或第一终端和第二网络设备之间的的链路的无线承载配置信息。第四承载配置信息是第二网络设备通过第一网络设备给第一终端的配置信息，可以包括第一终端与第二终端之间的RLC承载配置，以及第一终端与第二网络设备之间的的端到端的PDCP配置。
S808：第一网络设备接收第五消息，以及向第一终端发送第一RRC连接重配消息，该第一RRC连接重配消息包括第一标识、第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，所述第一标识用于标识第一终端，第一指示信息用于指示第一终端进行通信路径切换，第二标识用于标识第二终端，第二终端为通信路径切换的目标终端。也就是说，第一网络设备使用该第一终端的rrc-transcationidentifier给第一终端发送该第一RRC连接重配消息。
S809：第一终端与第二终端建立单播连接。
S811：第一终端根据第一RRC连接重配消息中的配置信息配置相应的无线承载。在完成RRC连接重配之后，通过第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一RRC连接重配完成消息。第二终端在转发该第一RRC连接重配完成消息时携带第一终端的第一标识，即包含第一终端的rrc-transcationidentifier。
第一终端在转发第一RRC连接重配完成消息之前，需要确定第一终端的第三标识，第三标识为第一终端的local ID。
本申请实施例中，第二终端可以通过以下方式确定：
第二终端根据第一终端的L2 ID分配第三标识后，第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一标识与第三标识的关联关系。也就是说，第二终端基于第一终端的L2 ID分配第三标识，并把第一终端的L2 ID与第三标识的关联关系上报给第二网络设备。
另一种可能的实现方式中，在第二终端转发第一终端向第二网络设备发送第一RRC连接重配完成消息时，此时，第二终端还没有为该第一终端建立专用的信令无线承载，在该实现方式下，方法800可以有几种方式转发该第一RRC连接重配完成消息：通过预设默认的或提前配置的SRB通道或者通过请求建立SRB通道，具体实现方式可以参考方法700中的S711中的相关描述。
操作S812：第二网络设备向第二终端发送第二RRC连接重配消息，该第二RRC连接重配消息包括第一承载的配置信息用于第二终端建立第二终端与第一终端之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和第二终端与所述第二网络设备之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。
其中，第二RRC连接重配消息可以包括第一无线承载配置信息，第二无线承载配置信息，第一无线承载配置信息中的至少一个第一无线承载配置信息与第二无线承载配置信息中的至少一个第二无线承载配置信息的映射关系。
第一无线承载配置信息为用于在第二终端和第一终端之间的通信链路传输第一终端的数据和信令的无线承载。第二无线承载配置信息为用于在第二终端和基站之间的通信链路传输第一终端的数据和信令的无线承载。
相应的，第二终端接收第二网络设备发送的第二RRC连接重配消息消息，以及根据该第二RRC连接重配消息消息配置相应的无线承载。
其中，第二终端根据第一终端的第三标识和第一无线承载配置信息配置与第一终端间的通信链路的无线承载，以及根据第一终端的第三标识和第二无线承载配置信息配置用于在第二终端和基站间的通信链路上传输第一终端的数据和信令的无线承载，以及根据第一无线承载和第二无线承载之间的映射关系建立以上两段通信链路承载之间的映射关系。
在第二终端完成第二RRC连接重配消息中相关配置后，第二终端向第二网络设备发送第二RRC连接重配消息完成消息。
相应的，第二网络设备接收第二终端发送的第二配置完成消息。
可以理解的，本申请上述各个方法实施例中，这些操作或步骤仅是示例，本申请实施例还可以执行其它操作或者各种操作的变形。此外，各个操作可以按照本申请实施例呈现的不同的顺序来执行，并且有可能并非要执行本申请实施例中的全部操作。
可以理解的是，本申请上述实施例中，由终端(第一终端或第二终端)实现的方法，也可以由可配置于终端的部件(例如芯片，处理器，芯片系统或者电路)实现，由网络设备(第一网络设备或者第二网络设备)实现的方法，也可以由可配置于网络设备的部件(例如芯片，处理器，芯片系统或者电路)实现。此外，第一网络设备也可以称为源基站，第二网络设备也可以称为目标基站，第一终端也可以称为远端终端或远程终端，第二终端也可以称为中继终端。
本申请上述实施例中，主要以第一网络设备和第二网络设备为不同的网络设备为例介绍的，容易理解的，当第一网络设备和第二网络设备为同一网络设备时，也就是说，第一终端和第二终端接入的是同一网络设备时，本申请上述实施例中第二网络设备的操作可以由第一网络设备实现，第一网络设备和第二网络设备之间交互的操作可以在第一网络设备内部进行实现。
上述主要从各个网元之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。相应的，本申请实施例还提供了通信装置，该通信装置用于实现上述各种方法。该通信装置可以为上述各个方法实施例中所涉及到的终端设备(第一终端或第二终端)，或者包含上述终端设备的装置，或者为可用于终端设备的部件(例如芯片，处理器，芯片系统或者电路)；或者，该通信装置可以为上述各个方法实施例中所涉及到的网络设备(例如第一网络设备、第二网络设备)，或者包含上述网络设备的装置，或者为可用于网络设备的部件；可以理解的是，该通信装置为了实现上述功能，其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法操作，本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。本领域技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法实施例中对通信装置进行功能模块的划分，例如，可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块，也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。
以下，结合图9至图10详细说明本申请实施例提供的装置。应理解，装置实施例的描述与方法实施例的描述相互对应，因此，未详细描述的内容可以参见上文方法实施例，为 了简洁，部分内容不再赘述。
图9示出了本申请一个实施例的通信装置900的结构示意图。应理解，该通信装置900可以实现图3所示的实施例中的第一终端所对应的任意功能。该通信装置可以是终端设备，也可以是可配置于终端设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)。该通信装置900包括：处理单元910和通信单元920。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中的通信单元也可以称为收发单元(模块)，处理单元可以称为处理模块。
示例性的，通信单元920用于向第二终端发送第一消息，第一消息包括第一标识，该第一标识用于标识第一终端。其中，关于第一消息和第一标识的相关描述可以参考前面实施例的相关描述，此处不再赘述。
可选的，通信单元920还可以通过第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一RRC连接重配完成消息。
可选的，通信单元920还用于接收第一网络设备发送的第一RRC连接重配消息。
可选的，通信单元920还用于向第一网络设备发送第六消息，该第六消息可以包括至少一个第二候选标识，该第二候选标识用于标识第二候选终端，第二候选终端为第一终端进行通信路径切换的候选目标终端。
可选的，处理单元910用于根据第一RRC连接重配消息完成相应的配置。
一种可能的设计中，处理单元910可以是处理器。通信单元920可以是收发器，或者通信单元920还可以是通信接口。存储单元930可以是存储器。
一种可能的方式中，该通信装置900可以实现图3所示的实施例中的第二终端所对应的任意功能。该通信装置可以是终端设备，也可以是可配置于终端设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)。该通信装置900包括：处理单元910和通信单元920，可选的，还可以包括存储单元930。
示例性的，通信单元920用于接收第一终端发送的第一消息，该第一消息包括第一标识，该第一标识用于标识第一终端。其中，关于第一消息和第一标识的相关描述可以参考前面实施例的相关描述，此处不再赘述。
可选的，通信单元920还用于转发第一终端向第二网络设备发送的第一RRC连接重配完成消息。
可选的，处理单元910用于确定第三标识。其中，关于确定第三标识的相关描述可以参考前面实施例的相关描述，此处不再赘述。
可选的，通信单元920还用于接收第二网络设备的第二消息，该第二消息包括第一承载的配置信息。第二消息的相关描述可以参考前面实施例的相关描述，此处不再赘述。
可选的，处理单元910还用于根据该第一承载的配置信息建立第一承载，第一承载包括：第二终端与第一终端之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和第二终端与第二网络设备之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。
可选的，通信单元920还用于接收第二网络设备的第二RRC连接重配消息，所述第二RRC连接重配消息携带第三标识。
可选的，通信装置900还可以包括存储单元930。该存储单元930可以用于存储计算机执行指令和/或数据等其他信息。处理单元910可以读取存储单元930中存储的指令或者数 据，实现对应的方案。
一种可能的方式中，该通信装置900可以实现图4所示的实施例中的第一终端所对应的任意功能。该通信装置可以是终端设备，也可以是可配置于终端设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)。该通信装置900包括：处理单元910和通信单元920，可选的，还可以包括存储单元930。
示例性的，通信单元920用于向第一网络设备发送第六消息，该第六消息包括第一标识。该第六消息可以包括第一标识，至少一个第二候选标识，第二候选标识用于第二候选终端，第二候选终端为所述第一终端进行通信路径切换的候选目标终端。
可选的，通信单元920用于接收第一网络设备发送的第一RRC连接重配消息，该第一RRC连接重配消息包括第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，第一指示信息用于指示第一终端进行通信路径切换，第二终端为第一终端进行路径切换的目标终端。
可选的，处理单元910用于根据第一RRC连接重配消息建立相应的中继链路相关的承载。
可选的，处理单元910用于根据第一RRC连接重配消息中的第四承载配置信息建立第一终端和第二终端之间的链路的无线承载，和/或第一终端和第二网络设备之间的的链路的无线承载。可选的，处理单元910还用于建立第一终端与第二终端之间的RLC承载，以及第一终端与第二网络设备之间的的端到端的PDCP。
可选的，处理单元910根据第一RRC连接重配消息完成RRC连接重配之后，通信单元920还用于通过第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一RRC连接重配完成消息，用于指示该第一终端完成RRC连接重配。
可选的，处理单元910还用于和第二终端建立单播连接。
一种可能的方式中，该通信装置900可以实现图5至图8任意一图所示的实施例中的第一终端所对应的任意功能。该通信装置可以是终端设备，也可以是可配置于终端设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)。该通信装置900包括：处理单元910和通信单元920，可选的，还可以包括存储单元930。该通信装置900实现该功能的相关过程可以参考前面实施例的相关描述，此处不再赘述。
一种可能的方式中，该通信装置900可以实现图4所示的实施例中的第二终端所对应的任意功能。该通信装置可以是终端设备，也可以是可配置于终端设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)。该通信装置900包括：处理单元910和通信单元920，可选的，还可以包括存储单元930。
示例性的，通信单元920用于转发第一终端向第二网络设备发送的第一RRC连接重配完成消息。
可选的，处理单元910用于和第一终端建立单播连接。
可选的，通信单元920还用于接收第二网络设备的第二消息，该第二消息包括第一承载的配置信息。
可选的，处理单元910还用于根据该第一承载的配置信息建立第一承载，第一承载包括：第二终端与第一终端之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和第二终端与第二网络设备之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。
可选的，通信单元920还用于向第二网络设备发送第一承载建立完成消息，用于指示完成第一承载的建立。
可选的，处理单元910还用于根据第二消息中包括的第一标识确定第三标识。
可选的，通信单元920还用于接收第二网络设备发送的第二RRC连接重配消息，该第二RRC连接重配消息携带第三标识，用于指示第二终端建立第二终端与第一终端之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和第二终端与第二网络设备之间的传输第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。
一种可能的方式中，该通信装置900可以实现图5至图8任意一图所示的实施例中的第二终端所对应的任意功能。该通信装置可以是终端设备，也可以是可配置于终端设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)。该通信装置900包括：处理单元910和通信单元920，可选的，还可以包括存储单元930。该通信装置900实现该功能的相关过程可以参考前面实施例的相关描述，此处不再赘述。
图10示出了本申请一个实施例的通信装置1000的结构示意图。应理解，该通信装置1000可以实现图3所示的实施例中的第一网络设备所对应的任意功能。该通信装置可以是网络设备，也可以是可配置于网络设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)。该通信装置1000包括：处理单元1010和通信单元1020。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中的通信单元也可以称为收发单元(模块)，处理单元可以称为处理模块。
通信单元1020用于接收第一终端发送的第六消息，其中，第六消息可以包括至少一个第二候选标识，该第二候选标识用于标识第二候选终端，第二候选终端为第一终端进行通信路径切换的候选目标终端；该第六消息可以为第一终端的测量报告。
处理单元1010用于根据至少一个第二候选标识确定第二标识，第二标识为第一终端进行通信路径切换的目标终端的标识。
可选的，通信单元1020还向第二网络设备发送第四消息用于请求将第一终端的通信路径切换到第二终端下，可选的，第四消息可以包括第二终端的标识(例如，C-RNTI)和第一终端的上下文信息。
可选的，通信单元1020还接收第二网络设备的第五消息，该第五消息包括第一RRC连接重配消息，该第一RRC连接重配消息包括第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，第一指示信息用于指示第一终端进行通信路径切换，第二标识用于标识第二终端，该第二终端为通信路径切换的目标终端，该第一RRC连接重配消息携带第一标识。
可选的，通信单元1020还向第一终端发送第一RRC连接重配消息，该第一RRC连接重配消息包括第一标识、第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，第一指示信息用于指示第一终端进行通信路径切换，第二终端为第一终端进行路径切换的目标终端。
一种可能的设计中，该通信装置1000可以实现图3所示的实施例中的第二网络设备所对应的任意功能。该通信装置可以是网络设备，也可以是可配置于网络设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)。该通信装置1000包括：处理单元1010和通信单元1020。
示例性的，通信单元1020用于接收第一网络设备发送的第四消息用于请求将第一终端的通信路径切换到第二终端下，可选的，第四消息可以包括第二终端的标识(例如，C-RNTI)和第一终端的上下文信息。
可选的，通信单元1020还向第一网络设备发送第五消息，该第五消息包括第一RRC连接重配消息，该第一RRC连接重配消息包括第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，第一指示信 息用于指示第一终端进行通信路径切换，第二标识用于标识第二终端，该第二终端为通信路径切换的目标终端，该第一RRC连接重配消息携带第一标识。
可选的，通信单元1020还用于接收第二终端转发的来自第一终端的第一RRC连接重配完成消息。
可选的，通信单元1020还用于向第二终端发送第二消息，该第二消息包括第一承载的配置信息。第二消息的相关描述可以参考前面实施例的相关描述，此处不再赘述。
一种可能的设计中，处理单元1010可以是处理器。通信单元1020可以是收发器，或者通信单元1020还可以是通信接口。存储单元1030可以是存储器。
可选的，通信装置1000还可以包括存储单元1030。该存储单元1030可以用于存储计算机执行指令和/或数据等其他信息。处理单元1010可以读取存储单元1030中存储的指令或者数据，实现对应的方案。
一种可能的设计中，该通信装置1000可以实现图4至图8任意一图所示的实施例中的第二网络设备所对应的任意功能。该通信装置可以是网络设备，也可以是可配置于网络设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)。该通信装置1000包括：处理单元1010和通信单元1020。该通信装置1000实现该功能的相关过程可以参考前面实施例的相关描述，此处不再赘述。
一种可能的设计中，该通信装置1000可以实现图4至图8任意一图所示的实施例中的第一网络设备所对应的任意功能。该通信装置可以是网络设备，也可以是可配置于网络设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)。该通信装置1000包括：处理单元1010和通信单元1020。该通信装置1000实现该功能的相关过程可以参考前面实施例的相关描述，此处不再赘述。
可以理解的是，上述各个单元也可以称为模块或者电路等，并且上述各个单元可以独立设置，也可以全部或者部分集成。
应理解以上装置中单元的划分仅仅是一种逻辑功能的划分，实际实现时可以全部或部分集成到一个物理实体上，也可以物理上分开。且装置中的单元可以全部以软件通过处理元件调用的形式实现；也可以全部以硬件的形式实现；还可以部分单元以软件通过处理元件调用的形式实现，部分单元以硬件的形式实现。例如，各个单元可以为单独设立的处理元件，也可以集成在装置的某一个芯片中实现，此外，也可以以程序的形式存储于存储器中，由装置的某一个处理元件调用并执行该单元的功能。此外这些单元全部或部分可以集成在一起，也可以独立实现。这里所述的处理元件又可以成为处理器，可以是一种具有信号的处理能力的集成电路。在实现过程中，上述方法的各个操作或以上各个单元可以通过处理器元件中的硬件的集成逻辑电路实现，或者也可以是以软件通过处理元件调用的形式实现。
在一个例子中，以上任一装置中的单元可以是被配置成实施以上方法的一个或多个集成电路，例如：一个或多个特定集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit，ASIC)，或，一个或多个微处理器(digital singnal processor，DSP)，或，一个或者多个现场可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array，FPGA)，或这些集成电路形式中至少两种的组合。再如，当装置中的单元可以通过处理元件调度程序的形式实现时，该处理元件可以是通用处理器，例如中央处理器(Central Processing Unit，CPU)或其它可以调用程序的处理器。再如，这些单元可以集成在一起，以片上系统(system-on-a-chip，SOC)的形式实现。
以上用于接收的单元(例如接收单元)是一种该装置的接口电路，用于从其它装置接收信号。例如，当该装置以芯片的方式实现时，该接收单元是该芯片用于从其它芯片或装置接收信号的接口电路。以上用于发送的单元(例如发送单元)是一种该装置的接口电路，用于向其它装置发送信号。例如，当该装置以芯片的方式实现时，该发送单元是该芯片用于向其它芯片或装置发送信号的接口电路。
参考图11，为本申请实施例提供的一种终端的结构示意图。该终端用于实现以上实施例中终端(如第一终端或第二终端)的操作。如图11所示，该终端包括：天线1110、射频装置1120、信号处理部分1130。天线1110与射频装置1120连接。在下行方向上，射频装置1120通过天线1110接收网络设备或其他终端发送的信息，将网络设备或其他终端发送的信息发送给信号处理部分1130进行处理。在上行方向上，信号处理部分1130对终端的信息进行处理，并发送给射频装置1120，射频装置1120对终端的信息进行处理后经过天线1110发送给网络设备或其他终端。
信号处理部分1130用于实现对数据各通信协议层的处理。信号处理部分1130可以为该终端的一个子系统，则该终端还可以包括其它子系统，例如中央处理子系统，用于实现对终端操作系统以及应用层的处理；再如，周边子系统用于实现与其它设备的连接。信号处理部分1130可以为单独设置的芯片。可选的，以上的装置可以位于信号处理部分1130。
信号处理部分1130可以包括一个或多个处理元件1131，例如，包括一个主控CPU和其它集成电路，以及包括接口电路1133。此外，该信号处理部分1130还可以包括存储元件1132。存储元件1132用于存储数据和程序，用于执行以上方法中终端所执行的方法的程序可能存储，也可能不存储于该存储元件1132中，例如，存储于信号处理部分1130之外的存储器中，使用时信号处理部分1130加载该程序到缓存中进行使用。接口电路1133用于与装置通信。以上装置可以位于信号处理部分1130，该信号处理部分1130可以通过芯片实现，该芯片包括至少一个处理元件和接口电路，其中处理元件用于执行以上终端执行的任一种方法的各个操作，接口电路用于与其它装置通信。在一种实现中，实现以上方法中各个操作的单元可以通过处理元件调度程序的形式实现，例如该装置包括处理元件和存储元件，处理元件调用存储元件存储的程序，以执行以上方法实施例中终端执行的方法。存储元件可以为处理元件处于同一芯片上的存储元件，即片内存储元件。
在另一种实现中，用于执行以上方法中终端所执行的方法的程序可以在与处理元件处于不同芯片上的存储元件，即片外存储元件。此时，处理元件从片外存储元件调用或加载程序于片内存储元件上，以调用并执行以上方法实施例中终端执行的方法。
在又一种实现中，终端实现以上方法中各个操作的单元可以是被配置成一个或多个处理元件，这些处理元件设置于信号处理部分1130上，这里的处理元件可以为集成电路，例如：一个或多个ASIC，或，一个或多个DSP，或，一个或者多个FPGA，或者这些类集成电路的组合。这些集成电路可以集成在一起，构成芯片。
实现以上方法中各个操作的单元可以集成在一起，以片上系统(system-on-a-chip，SOC)的形式实现，该SOC芯片，用于实现以上方法。该芯片内可以集成至少一个处理元件和存储元件，由处理元件调用存储元件的存储的程序的形式实现以上终端执行的方法；或者，该芯片内可以集成至少一个集成电路，用于实现以上终端执行的方法；或者，可以结合以上实现方式，部分单元的功能通过处理元件调用程序的形式实现，部分单元的功能通 过集成电路的形式实现。
可见，以上装置可以包括至少一个处理元件和接口电路，其中至少一个处理元件用于执行以上方法实施例所提供的任一种终端执行的方法。处理元件可以以第一种方式：即调用存储元件存储的程序的方式执行终端执行的部分或全部操作；也可以以第二种方式：即通过处理器元件中的硬件的集成逻辑电路结合指令的方式执行终端执行的部分或全部操作；当然，也可以结合第一种方式和第二种方式执行终端执行的部分或全部操作。
这里的处理元件同以上描述，可以是通用处理器，例如CPU，还可以是被配置成实施以上方法的一个或多个集成电路，例如：一个或多个ASIC，或，一个或多个微处理器DSP，或，一个或者多个FPGA等，或这些集成电路形式中至少两种的组合。存储元件可以是一个存储器，也可以是多个存储元件的统称。
本领域普通技术人员可以理解：本申请中涉及的第一、第二、第三、第四等各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分，并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围，也表示先后顺序。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“至少一个”是指一个或者多个。至少两个是指两个或者多个。“至少一个”、“任意一个”或其类似表达，是指的这些项中的任意组合，包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如，a,b,或c中的至少一项(个、种)，可以表示：a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c，其中a,b,c可以是单个，也可以是多个。“多个”是指两个或两个以上，其它量词与之类似。
应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本发明实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算 机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包括一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质，(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk，SSD))等。
本申请实施例中所描述的各种说明性的逻辑单元和电路可以通过通用处理器，数字信号处理器，专用集成电路(ASIC)，现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或其它可编程逻辑装置，离散门或晶体管逻辑，离散硬件部件，或上述任何组合的设计来实现或操作所描述的功能。通用处理器可以为微处理器，可选地，该通用处理器也可以为任何传统的处理器、控制器、微控制器或状态机。处理器也可以通过计算装置的组合来实现，例如数字信号处理器和微处理器，多个微处理器，一个或多个微处理器联合一个数字信号处理器核，或任何其它类似的配置来实现。
本申请实施例中所描述的方法或算法的操作可以直接嵌入硬件、处理器执行的软件单元、或者这两者的结合。软件单元可以存储于随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory，RAM)、闪存、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory，ROM)、EPROM存储器、EEPROM存储器、寄存器、硬盘、可移动磁盘、CD-ROM或本领域中其它任意形式的存储媒介中。示例性地，存储媒介可以与处理器连接，以使得处理器可以从存储媒介中读取信息，并可以向存储媒介存写信息。可选地，存储媒介还可以集成到处理器中。处理器和存储媒介可以设置于ASIC中。
这些计算机程序指令也可装载到计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备上，使得在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行一系列操作步骤以产生计算机实现的处理，从而在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行的指令提供用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的操作。
本领域技术人员应该可以意识到，在上述一个或多个示例中，本申请所描述的功能可以用硬件、软件、固件或它们的任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以将这些功能存储在计算机可读介质中或者作为计算机可读介质上的一个或多个指令或代码进行传输。计算机可读介质包括计算机存储介质和通信介质，其中通信介质包括便于从一个地方向另一个地方传送计算机程序的任何介质。存储介质可以是通用或专用计算机能够存取的任何可用介质。
尽管结合具体特征及其实施例对本申请进行了描述，显而易见的，在不脱离本申请的精神和范围的情况下，可对其进行各种修改和组合。相应地，本说明书和附图仅仅是所附权利要求所界定的本申请的示例性说明，且视为已覆盖本申请范围内的任意和所有修改、变化、组合或等同物。显然，本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的范围。这样，倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内，则本申请也意图包括这些改动和变型在内。

Claims (69)

  1. 一种通信路径切换方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第二终端接收第一终端发送的第一消息，所述第一消息包括第一标识，所述第一标识用于标识所述第一终端；
    所述第二终端设备根据所述第一标识确定第三标识，所述第三标识用于标识基于所述第二终端的中继通信链路中的所述第一终端，所述第二终端为所述第一终端的通信路径切换的目标终端；
    所述第二终端根据所述第三标识转发所述第一终端向第二网络设备发送的第一无线资源控制RRC连接重配完成消息，所述第一RRC连接重配完成消息用于指示所述第一终端完成RRC连接重配。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二终端根据所述第一标识确定第三标识包括：
    所述第一标识为所述第三标识；或者，
    所述第二终端根据所述第一标识分配所述第三标识；或者，
    所述第二终端向所述第二网络设备发送所述第一标识；
    所述第二终端接收所述第二网络设备发送的第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息包括所述第三标识，以及所述第一标识与所述第三标识的关联关系。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第二终端接收所述第一终端发送的所述第一消息之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二终端接收所述第二网络设备的第二消息，所述第二消息包括第一承载的配置信息；
    所述第二终端根据所述第二消息建立所述第一承载，所述第一承载包括：第二终端与所述第一终端之间的传输所述第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和所述第二终端与所述第二网络设备之间的传输所述第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二消息还包括所述第一标识。
  5. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二消息还包括第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第二终端为所述第一终端的通信路径切换的目标终端；
    所述第二终端根据所述第四指示信息分配所述第三标识；
    所述第二终端设备向所述第二网络设备发送所述第三标识，所述第一标识为所述第三标识。
  6. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二终端通过所述第一承载转发所述第一RRC连接重配完成消息时携带所述第三标识。
  7. 根据权利要求1至6任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一标识为局部标识local ID或小区无线网络临时标识C-RNTI，5G临时移动用户标识5G-S-TMSI,无线资源控制处理标识rrc-TransactionIdentifier,或L2 ID，所述第三标识为所述第一终端的local ID。
  8. 一种通信路径切换方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一终端接收第一网络设备发送的第一无线资源控制RRC连接重配消息，所述第一RRC 连接重配消息包括第一标识、第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，所述第一标识用于标识所述第一终端，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一终端进行通信路径切换，所述第二标识用于标识第二终端，所述第二终端为所述通信路径切换的目标终端；
    所述第一终端向所述第二终端发送第一消息，所述第一消息包括所述第一标识。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：所述第一终端通过所述第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一RRC连接重配完成消息。
  10. 根据权利要求8或9所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一终端接收第一网络设备发送的第一RRC连接重配消息之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一终端向第一网络设备发送第六消息，所述第六消息包括至少一个第二候选标识，所述第二候选标识用于标识第二候选终端，所述第二候选终端为所述第一终端进行通信路径切换的候选目标终端。
  11. 根据权利要求8-10任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一标识为local ID，C-RNTI，5G-S-TMSI,或rrc-TransactionIdentifier。
  12. 根据权利要求8-11任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一网络设备和所述第二网络设备为同一或不同的网络设备。
  13. 一种通信路径切换方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一网络设备接收第二网络设备发送的第五消息，所述第五消息包括第一RRC连接重配消息，所述第一RRC连接重配消息包括第一标识、第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，所述第一标识用于标识第一终端，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一终端进行通信路径切换，所述第二标识用于标识第二终端，所述第二终端为所述通信路径切换的目标终端；
    所述第一网络设备向所述第一终端发送所述第一RRC连接重配消息。
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：所述第一网络设备接收所述第一终端发送的第六消息，所述第六消息包括至少一个第二候选标识，所述第二候选标识用于标识所述第二候选终端，所述第二候选终端为所述第一终端进行通信路径切换的候选目标终端；
    所述第一网络设备在所述至少一个第二候选标识中确定所述第二标识。
  15. 根据权利要求13或14所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一标识为local ID,C-RNTI，5G-S-TMSI,或rrc-TransactionIdentifier。
  16. 一种通信路径切换方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第二网络设备接收第一网络设备发送的第四消息，所述第四消息包括第二标识，所述第二标识用于标识第二终端，所述第二终端为所述第二网络设备覆盖范围内的终端，所述第四消息用于请求第一终端通过所述第二终端的中继服务接入所述第二网络设备；
    所述第二网络设备向所述第一网络设备发送第五消息，所述第五消息包括第一RRC连接重配消息，所述第一RRC连接重配消息包括所述第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，所述第一标识用于标识第一终端，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一终端进行通信路径切换，所述第二终端为所述通信路径切换的目标终端，该第一RRC连接重配消息携带第一标识。
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第二网络设备向所述第一网络设备发送所述第五消息之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二网络设备向所述第二终端发送第二消息，所述第二消息包括第一承载的配置 信息；
    所述第一承载的配置信息用于所述第二终端建立所述第一承载，所述第一承载包括：所述第二终端与所述第一终端之间的传输所述第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和所述第二终端与所述第二网络设备之间的传输所述第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二消息还包括所述第一标识。
  19. 根据权利要求17所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二消息还包括第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第二终端为所述第一终端的通信路径切换的目标终端；
    所述第二网络设备接收所述第二终端发送的第三标识，所述第三标识为所述第二终端根据所述第四指示信息分配的，所述第五消息中的所述第一标识为所述第三标识。
  20. 根据权利要求16-19任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二网络设备接收所述第二终端转发的所述第一终端的第一RRC连接重配完成消息和第三标识，所述第三标识用于标识基于所述第二终端的中继通信链路中的所述第一终端，所述第三标识与所述第一标识存在关联关系。
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第二网络设备接收所述第一RRC连接重配完成消息之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二网络设备接收所述第二终端发送的所述第一标识；
    所述第二网络设备根据所述第一标识分配所述第三标识；
    所述第二网络设备向所述第二终端发送所述第一标识与所述第三标识的关联关系；或者，
    所述第二网络设备接收所述第二终端发送的所述第一标识与所述第三标识的关联关系。
  22. 根据权利要求20或21所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第二网络设备接收所述第一RRC连接重配完成消息之后，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二网络设备向所述第二终端发送第二RRC连接重配消息，所述第二RRC连接重配消息携带所述第三标识。
  23. 根据权利要求16-22任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一标识为local ID，C-RNTI，5G-S-TMSI,或rrc-TransactionIdentifier，所述第三标识为local ID。
  24. 一种通信路径切换方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一网络设备接收第一终端发送的第六消息，所述第六消息包括至少一个第二候选标识，所述第二候选标识用于标识第二候选终端，所述第二候选终端为所述第一终端进行通信路径切换的候选目标终端；
    所述第一网络设备向所述第一终端发送第一RRC连接重配消息，所述第一RRC连接重配消息包括第二标识，第一标识和第一指示信息，其中，所述第一标识用于标识所述第一终端，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一终端进行通信路径切换，所述第二标识用于标识第二终端，所述第二终端为所述第一终端进行通信路径切换的目标终端。
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：所述第一网络设备在所述至少一个第二候选标识中确定所述第二标识。
  26. 根据权利要求24或25所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：所述第一网 络设备接收所述第二终端转发的来自所述第一终端的第一RRC连接重配完成消息。
  27. 根据权利要求24至26任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一网络设备向所述第一终端发送所述第一RRC连接重配消息之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一网络设备向第二终端发送第二消息，所述第二消息包括第一承载的配置信息，所述第一承载的配置信息用于所述第二终端建立所述第一承载，所述第一承载包括：所述第二终端与所述第一终端之间的传输所述第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和所述第二终端与所述第一网络设备之间的传输所述第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二消息还包括所述第一标识。
  29. 根据权利要求27所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二消息还包括第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第二终端为所述第一终端的通信路径切换的目标终端；
    所述第一网络设备接收所述第二终端发送的所述第三标识。
  30. 根据权利要求24至29任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一网络设备接收所述第一RRC连接重配完成消息之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一网络设备接收所述第二终端发送的所述第一标识；
    所述第一网络设备根据所述第一标识分配所述第三标识；
    所述第一网络设备向所述第二终端发送所述第一标识与所述第三标识的关联关系；或者，
    所述第一网络设备接收所述第二终端发送的所述第一标识与所述第三标识的关联关系。
  31. 根据权利要求30所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一网络设备接收所述第一RRC连接重配完成消息之后，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一网络设备向所述第二终端发送第二RRC连接重配消息，所述第二RRC连接重配消息携带所述第三标识。
    所述第一网络设备接收所述第二终端发送的所述第三标识。
  32. 根据权利要求24至31任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一标识为local ID，C-RNTI，5G-S-TMSI,或rrc-TransactionIdentifier，所述第二标识为C-RNTI，所述第三标识为local ID。
  33. 一种通信装置，所述通信装置为第二终端，或者，所述通信装置为用于实现所述第二终端对应功能的装置，其特征在于，所述装置包括：
    通信单元，用于接收第一终端发送的第一消息，所述第一消息包括第一标识，所述第一标识用于标识所述第一终端；
    处理单元，用于根据所述第一标识确定第三标识，所述第三标识用于标识基于所述第二终端的中继通信链路中的所述第一终端，所述第二终端为所述第一终端的通信路径切换的目标终端；
    处理单元，还用于根据所述第三标识转发所述第一终端向第二网络设备发送的第一无线资源控制RRC连接重配完成消息，所述第一RRC连接重配完成消息用于指示所述第一终端完成RRC连接重配。
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元具体用于确定所述第一标识为所述第三标识；或者，
    所述处理单元具体用于根据所述第一标识分配所述第三标识；或者，
    所述通信单元具体用于向所述第二网络设备发送所述第一标识；
    所述通信单元具体用于接收所述第二网络设备发送的第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息包括所述第三标识，以及所述第一标识与所述第三标识的关联关系。
  35. 根据权利要求33或34所述的装置，其特征在于，在所述通信单元接收所述第一终端发送的所述第一消息之前，所述通信单元还用于接收所述第二网络设备的第二消息，所述第二消息包括第一承载的配置信息；
    所述处理单元用于根据所述第二消息建立所述第一承载，所述第一承载包括：第二终端与所述第一终端之间的传输所述第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和所述第二终端与所述第二网络设备之间的传输所述第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。
  36. 根据权利要求35所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第二消息还包括所述第一标识。
  37. 根据权利要求35所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第二消息还包括第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第二终端为所述第一终端的通信路径切换的目标终端；
    所述处理单元用于根据所述第四指示信息分配所述第三标识；
    所述通信单元用于向所述第二网络设备发送所述第三标识，所述第一标识为所述第三标识。
  38. 根据权利要求35所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述通信单元用于通过所述第一承载转发所述第一RRC连接重配完成消息时携带所述第三标识。
  39. 根据权利要求33至38任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一标识为局部标识local ID或小区无线网络临时标识C-RNTI，5G临时移动用户标识5G-S-TMSI,无线资源控制处理标识rrc-TransactionIdentifier,或L2 ID，所述第三标识为所述第一终端的local ID。
  40. 一种通信装置，所述通信装置为第一终端，或者，所述通信装置为用于实现所述第一终端对应功能的装置，其特征在于，所述装置包括：
    通信单元，用于接收第一网络设备发送的第一无线资源控制RRC连接重配消息，所述第一RRC连接重配消息包括第一标识、第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，所述第一标识用于标识所述第一终端，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一终端进行通信路径切换，所述第二标识用于标识第二终端，所述第二终端为所述通信路径切换的目标终端；
    所述通信单元，还用于向所述第二终端发送第一消息，所述第一消息包括所述第一标识。
  41. 根据权利要求40所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信单元，还用于通过所述第二终端向第二网络设备发送第一RRC连接重配完成消息。
  42. 根据权利要求40或41所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信单元，还用于向第一网络设备发送第六消息，所述第六消息包括至少一个第二候选标识，所述第二候选标识用于标识第二候选终端，所述第二候选终端为所述第一终端进行通信路径切换的候选目标终端。
  43. 根据权利要求40-42任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一标识为local ID，C-RNTI，5G-S-TMSI,或rrc-TransactionIdentifier。
  44. 根据权利要求40-43任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一网络设备和所述第二网络设备为同一或不同的网络设备。
  45. 一种通信装置，所述通信装置为第一网络设备，或者，所述通信装置为用于实现所述第一网络设备对应功能的装置，其特征在于，所述装置包括：
    通信单元，用于接收第二网络设备发送的第五消息，所述第五消息包括第一RRC连接重配消息，所述第一RRC连接重配消息包括第一标识、第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，所述第一标识用于标识第一终端，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一终端进行通信路径切换，所述第二标识用于标识第二终端，所述第二终端为所述通信路径切换的目标终端；
    所述通信单元，还用于向所述第一终端发送所述第一RRC连接重配消息。
  46. 根据权利要求45所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信单元，还用于接收所述第一终端发送的第六消息，所述第六消息包括至少一个第二候选标识，所述第二候选标识用于标识所述第二候选终端，所述第二候选终端为所述第一终端进行通信路径切换的候选目标终端；
    所述装置还包括处理单元，所述处理单元，用于在所述至少一个第二候选标识中确定所述第二标识。
  47. 根据权利要求45或46所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一标识为local ID,C-RNTI，5G-S-TMSI,或rrc-TransactionIdentifier。
  48. 一种通信装置，所述通信装置为第二网络设备，或者，所述通信装置为用于实现所述第二网络设备对应功能的装置，其特征在于，所述装置包括：
    通信单元，用于接收第一网络设备发送的第四消息，所述第四消息包括第二标识，所述第二标识用于标识第二终端，所述第二终端为所述第二网络设备覆盖范围内的终端，所述第四消息用于请求第一终端通过所述第二终端的中继服务接入所述第二网络设备；
    所述通信单元，还用于向所述第一网络设备发送第五消息，所述第五消息包括第一RRC连接重配消息，所述第一RRC连接重配消息包括所述第二标识和第一指示信息，其中，所述第一标识用于标识第一终端，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一终端进行通信路径切换，所述第二终端为所述通信路径切换的目标终端，该第一RRC连接重配消息携带第一标识。
  49. 根据权利要求48所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信单元，还用于向所述第二终端发送第二消息，所述第二消息包括第一承载的配置信息；
    其中，所述第一承载的配置信息用于所述第二终端建立所述第一承载，所述第一承载包括：所述第二终端与所述第一终端之间的传输所述第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和所述第二终端与所述第二网络设备之间的传输所述第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。
  50. 根据权利要求49所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第二消息还包括所述第一标识。
  51. 根据权利要求49所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第二消息还包括第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第二终端为所述第一终端的通信路径切换的目标终端；
    所述通信单元，还用于接收所述第二终端发送的第三标识，所述第三标识为所述第二终端根据所述第四指示信息分配的，所述第五消息中的所述第一标识为所述第三标识。
  52. 根据权利要求48-51任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述通信单元，还用于接收所述第二终端转发的所述第一终端的第一RRC连接重配完成消息和第三标识，所述第三标识用于标识基于所述第二终端的中继通信链路中的所述第一终端，所述第三标识与所述第一标识存在关联关系。
  53. 根据权利要求52所述的装置，其特征在于，所述装置还包括处理单元，
    所述通信单元，还用于接收所述第二终端发送的所述第一标识；
    所述处理单元，用于根据所述第一标识分配所述第三标识；
    所述通信单元，还用于向所述第二终端发送所述第一标识与所述第三标识的关联关系；或者，
    所述通信单元，还用于接收所述第二终端发送的所述第一标识与所述第三标识的关联关系。
  54. 根据权利要求52或53所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信单元，还用于向所述第二终端发送第二RRC连接重配消息，所述第二RRC连接重配消息携带所述第三标识。
  55. 根据权利要求48-54任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一标识为local ID，C-RNTI，5G-S-TMSI,或rrc-TransactionIdentifier，所述第三标识为local ID。
  56. 一种通信装置，所述通信装置为第一网络设备，或者，所述通信装置为用于实现所述第一网络设备对应功能的装置，其特征在于，所述装置包括：
    通信单元，用于接收第一终端发送的第六消息，所述第六消息包括至少一个第二候选标识，所述第二候选标识用于标识第二候选终端，所述第二候选终端为所述第一终端进行通信路径切换的候选目标终端；
    所述通信单元，还用于向所述第一终端发送第一RRC连接重配消息，所述第一RRC连接重配消息包括第二标识，第一标识和第一指示信息，其中，所述第一标识用于标识所述第一终端，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一终端进行通信路径切换，所述第二标识用于标识第二终端，所述第二终端为所述第一终端进行通信路径切换的目标终端。
  57. 根据权利要求56所述的装置，其特征在于，所述装置还包括处理单元，所述处理单元用于在所述至少一个第二候选标识中确定所述第二标识。
  58. 根据权利要求56或57所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信单元，还用于接收所述第二终端转发的来自所述第一终端的第一RRC连接重配完成消息。
  59. 根据权利要求56至58任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，通信单元，还用于向第二终端发送第二消息，所述第二消息包括第一承载的配置信息，所述第一承载的配置信息用于所述第二终端建立所述第一承载，所述第一承载包括：所述第二终端与所述第一终端之间的传输所述第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载，和所述第二终端与所述第一网络设备之间的传输所述第一终端的信令及数据的无线承载。
  60. 根据权利要求59所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第二消息还包括所述第一标识。
  61. 根据权利要求59所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第二消息还包括第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第二终端为所述第一终端的通信路径切换的目标终端；
    所述通信单元，还用于接收所述第二终端发送的所述第三标识。
  62. 根据权利要求56至61任一项所述的装置，其特征在于；
    所述通信单元，还用于接收所述第二终端发送的所述第一标识；
    所述处理单元，用于根据所述第一标识分配所述第三标识；
    所述通信单元，还用于向所述第二终端发送所述第一标识与所述第三标识的关联关系；或者，
    所述通信单元，还用于接收所述第二终端发送的所述第一标识与所述第三标识的关联关系。
  63. 根据权利要求62所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信单元，还用于向所述第二终端发送第二RRC连接重配消息，所述第二RRC连接重配消息携带所述第三标识。
    所述通信单元，还用于接收所述第二终端发送的所述第三标识。
  64. 根据权利要求56至63任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一标识为local ID，C-RNTI，5G-S-TMSI,或rrc-TransactionIdentifier，所述第二标识为C-RNTI，所述第三标识为local ID。
  65. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得所述装置执行如权利要求1至7中任一项所述的方法，或如权利要求8至12中任一项所述的方法。
  66. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：处理器，所述处理器与存储器耦合，所述存储器用于存储程序或指令，当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时，使得所述装置执行如权利要求13至15中任一项所述的方法，或如权利要求16至23中任一项，或如权利要求24至32中任一项所述的方法。
  67. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有计算机程序或指令，其特征在于，所述计算机程序或指令被执行时使得计算机执行如权利要求1至32中任一项所述的方法。
  68. 一种通信系统，包括：如权利要求65中所述的装置，和/或，权利要求66中所述的装置。
  69. 一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序，当所述计算机程序运行时，使得计算机执行如权利要求1至32中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2021/103293 2020-06-30 2021-06-29 一种通信路径切换方法、装置及系统 Ceased WO2022002080A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP21832781.5A EP4171121A4 (en) 2020-06-30 2021-06-29 Communication path switching method, apparatus, and system
US18/146,552 US20230156564A1 (en) 2020-06-30 2022-12-27 Communication path switching method, apparatus, and system

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010622576.7 2020-06-30
CN202010622576.7A CN113873586B (zh) 2020-06-30 2020-06-30 一种通信路径切换方法、装置及系统

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/146,552 Continuation US20230156564A1 (en) 2020-06-30 2022-12-27 Communication path switching method, apparatus, and system

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022002080A1 true WO2022002080A1 (zh) 2022-01-06

Family

ID=78981906

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/103293 Ceased WO2022002080A1 (zh) 2020-06-30 2021-06-29 一种通信路径切换方法、装置及系统

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US20230156564A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4171121A4 (zh)
CN (2) CN113873586B (zh)
WO (1) WO2022002080A1 (zh)

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023212484A1 (en) * 2022-04-28 2023-11-02 Qualcomm Incorporated Network coordination during path switching and multi-path scenarios
WO2024007176A1 (en) * 2022-07-05 2024-01-11 Nec Corporation Methods, devices, and medium for communication
EP4307769A1 (en) * 2022-07-15 2024-01-17 Nokia Technologies Oy Enhancement of service continuity of remote ue during inter-gnb mobility in sidelink based ue-to-network relay
WO2024121402A1 (en) * 2022-12-09 2024-06-13 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Method and apparatus for relay communication
EP4557827A4 (en) * 2022-07-15 2025-08-20 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co Ltd PATH SWITCHING METHOD, AND APPARATUS, DEVICE, AND STORAGE MEDIUM

Families Citing this family (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN116847478A (zh) * 2022-03-24 2023-10-03 维沃移动通信有限公司 路径建立方法及装置、终端及网络侧设备
WO2023201520A1 (zh) * 2022-04-19 2023-10-26 富士通株式会社 多路径的配置方法、装置以及系统
CN114679756B (zh) * 2022-05-26 2022-08-05 武汉世炬信息技术有限公司 用户终端非激活状态的无线连接状态管理系统和方法
CN117835339A (zh) * 2022-09-28 2024-04-05 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及相关装置
CN118785532A (zh) * 2023-04-06 2024-10-15 华为技术有限公司 中继通信方法、装置及系统
WO2024229835A1 (en) * 2023-05-11 2024-11-14 Nec Corporation Devices and methods for communication
CN119071871A (zh) * 2023-06-02 2024-12-03 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法和装置
WO2025043735A1 (en) * 2023-09-01 2025-03-06 Nec Corporation Methods, devices and medium for communication

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN107889080A (zh) * 2016-09-29 2018-04-06 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种支持远端用户设备移动性的方法及装置
CN110402599A (zh) * 2017-03-10 2019-11-01 英特尔Ip公司 用于中继布置的演进节点b（enb）、用户设备（ue）以及在直接通信与间接通信之间切换的方法
US20200178343A1 (en) * 2017-08-09 2020-06-04 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for performing rrc connection procedure in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2017014716A1 (en) * 2015-07-23 2017-01-26 Intel IP Corporation Layer 2 relay protocols and mobility relay method
CN109417695B (zh) * 2017-01-10 2020-10-23 华为技术有限公司 一种通信路径转换方法及设备
US12047826B2 (en) * 2017-03-10 2024-07-23 Apple Inc. Evolved node-b (eNB), user equipment (UE) and methods of switching between direct and indirect communication for a relay arrangement
US10469154B2 (en) * 2017-03-30 2019-11-05 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for performing management of local id identifying a remote UE in a relay UE in wireless communication system and a device therefor
WO2018176416A1 (zh) * 2017-03-31 2018-10-04 华为技术有限公司 中继通信方法、装置和系统

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN107889080A (zh) * 2016-09-29 2018-04-06 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种支持远端用户设备移动性的方法及装置
CN110402599A (zh) * 2017-03-10 2019-11-01 英特尔Ip公司 用于中继布置的演进节点b（enb）、用户设备（ue）以及在直接通信与间接通信之间切换的方法
US20200178343A1 (en) * 2017-08-09 2020-06-04 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for performing rrc connection procedure in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
OPPO: "Update for solution 6-Layer-3 UE-to-Network Relay", 3GPP DRAFT; S2-2000321, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. SA WG2, no. Incheon, Korea; 20200113 - 20200117, 7 January 2020 (2020-01-07), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051842393 *
See also references of EP4171121A4

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023212484A1 (en) * 2022-04-28 2023-11-02 Qualcomm Incorporated Network coordination during path switching and multi-path scenarios
US12375902B2 (en) 2022-04-28 2025-07-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Network coordination during path switching and multi-path scenarios
WO2024007176A1 (en) * 2022-07-05 2024-01-11 Nec Corporation Methods, devices, and medium for communication
EP4307769A1 (en) * 2022-07-15 2024-01-17 Nokia Technologies Oy Enhancement of service continuity of remote ue during inter-gnb mobility in sidelink based ue-to-network relay
EP4557827A4 (en) * 2022-07-15 2025-08-20 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co Ltd PATH SWITCHING METHOD, AND APPARATUS, DEVICE, AND STORAGE MEDIUM
WO2024121402A1 (en) * 2022-12-09 2024-06-13 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Method and apparatus for relay communication

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN113873586A (zh) 2021-12-31
EP4171121A4 (en) 2023-12-27
US20230156564A1 (en) 2023-05-18
EP4171121A1 (en) 2023-04-26
CN119584222A (zh) 2025-03-07
CN113873586B (zh) 2024-10-29

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN113873586B (zh) 一种通信路径切换方法、装置及系统
EP2995108B1 (en) Communication mechanism using co-primary spectrum sharing
US11627512B2 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting data
EP2919520A1 (en) Radio communication system and communication control method
JP6920550B2 (ja) 通信方法および装置ならびに無線アクセス・ネットワーク
JP2024537446A (ja) リモート端末情報の送信方法、受信方法及び機器
EP4280680B1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus for integrated access and backhaul (iab) system
EP3629538B1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
JP7754548B2 (ja) ハンドオーバー方法、通信装置、およびコンピュータ記憶媒体
WO2018228393A1 (zh) 通信方法、装置及存储介质
CN113543169A (zh) 一种信息传输方法、终端及网络设备
US12471134B2 (en) Communication method and apparatus for improving transmission of QOS information in communication between terminals
WO2019201245A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
TW201836382A (zh) 通信方法、輔網絡節點和終端
CN104919890A (zh) 上位基站、下位基站及无线通信系统
EP4152821A1 (en) Handover method and apparatus
WO2025152174A1 (zh) 无线通信方法及装置
CN109474913B (zh) 一种多跳传输方法和装置
CN116326118A (zh) 一种iab节点的mt的小区配置方法及装置
CN117882457B (zh) 无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备
US20240406763A1 (en) Communication method, terminal, communications device, and network device
WO2024067270A1 (zh) 一种切换方法及通信装置
CN120730543A (zh) 通信方法、通信装置和计算机可读存储介质
CN119136336A (zh) 一种中继通信方法、装置及系统
CN121713526A (zh) 用于数据传输的方法和通信设备

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21832781

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021832781

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20230117

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWG Wipo information: grant in national office

Ref document number: 202327001516

Country of ref document: IN